Skip to main content

Full text of "From Vita Nuova to Paradiso, two essays on the vital relations between Dante's successive works"

See other formats


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/fromvitanuovatopOOwickuoft 


PUBLICATIONS    OF    THE     UNIVERSITY    OF    MANCHESTER 


From  Vita  Nuova  to  Paradiso 


Published  by  the  University  of  Manchester  at 

THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS  (H.  M.  McKechnie,  M.A.,  Secretary) 

12  Lime  Grove,  Oxford  Road,  MANCHESTER 

LONGMANS,  GREEN  &  CO. 

London  :  39  Paternoster  Kovfy  E.C.4 

New  York  :  55  Fifth  Avenue 

Bombay  :  336  Hornby  Road 

Calcutta  :  6  Old  Court  House  Street 

Madras  :  167  Mount  Road 


From 

Vita  Nuova  to  Paradiso 


r/^O  ESSATS 

on  the  vital  relations  between  Dante's  successive 
works 


er 


^^     By 


PHILIP  H.  WICKSTEED.  M.A.,  LittD. 


V^ 


1790/  2 
33    3.   3  3 


1922 

Manchester       '       '       ^       At   the    University   Press 
London,  New  York,  Sec:   Longmans,  Green  &  Co. 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  MANCHESTER 
No.  CLI 


{All  rights  reserved) 


And  this  is  what  Rabbi  Hanina  said :  **  /  have 
learned  much  from  my  teachers  ;  and  from  my  com- 
panions more  than  from  my  teachers  ;  and  from  my 
pupils  more  than  from  all" 


PREFATORY     SYNOPSIS 

I  suppose  it  is  still  true  (as  it  certainly  was  not  long 
ago)  that  the  successive  Cantiche  of  Dante's  Comedy 
appeal  to  successively  narrowing  circles  of  readers. 
Many  who  are  fairly  acquainted  with  representative 
portions  at  least  of  the  Inferno^  and  in  whose  minds 
Dante  ranks  high  as  a  poet  on  the  strength  of  them, 
have  but  the  vaguest  conception  even  of  the  Fur- 
gatorio.  Many  readers  of  the  Purgatorio^  to  whom 
Dante  is  a  prophet  and  teacher  as  well  as  a  poet,  find 
theirhigh  anticipations  perplexed  and  perhaps  chilled 
when  they  come  to  the  Paradiso,  Many  of  those  to 
whom  parts  of  the  Paradiso  itself  make  a  direct 
appeal  of  transmuting  power,  on  the  mystic  and 
experiential  side,  are  baffled  by  the  intricacies  of  its 
scholastic  theology  and  philosophy. 

But  to  Dante  himself  the  movement  of  the  whole 
Comedy,  from  the  first  Canto  to  the  last,  was  deter- 
mined and  controlled  by  the  central  thought  of  the 
Paradiso,  He  spoke  as  one  whom  a  vision  of  the 
ultimate  goal  and  the  inmost  meaning  of  life  was 
drawing,  as  with  some  spiritual  magnetism  or  force 
of  gravitation,  to  the  conclusive  and  all-fulfilling 
consummation,  with  a  trend  so  overmastering  as  to 
assimilate  to  itself  all  experiences  of  life  and  all 
records  of  history,  and  set  them  in  living  relations 
with  each  other  and  with  itself. 

In  the  Comedy  Dante  strove  to  set  time  in  the 
light  of  eternity,  fully  convinced  that  so  far  as  he 
could  do  this  he  would  turn  "  folk  living  in  this  mortal 
life  from  misery  and  bring  them  to  the  state  of  bliss." 

vii 


PREFATORY    SYNOPSIS 

^  He  was  well  aware  that  many  who  started  with 
him  on  what  he  loves  to  think  of  as  his  "  voyage  " 
would  be  more  interested  in  the  incidents  of  the 
passage  than  in  the  "  desired  haven  *'  which  it 
sought ;  and  he  is  even  content  that  relatively  few 
should  follow  his  special  guidance  to  the  end.  But 
he  could  at  least  reckon  on  all  his  serious  readers  so 
far  understanding  his  purpose  as  to  share  with  him 
the  clear  intellectual  conception,  if  not  the  mystic 
realization,  of  the  nature  of  the  haven  itself.  Heaven 
and  the  beatific  vision  meant  something  perfectly 
definite  and  intelligible  to  Dante's  contemporaries  ; 
and,  however  much  or  little  it  might  be  to  the  heart 
or  soul,  it  was  firmly  enough  held  in  the  brain  to 
enable  them  to  understand  how  the  successive 
portions  of  the  Comedy  were  related  to  it,  and 
how  they  took  their  direction  and  movement 
from  it. 

It  is  the  object  of  the  first  of  the  two  essays  in  this 
volume  to  help  the  modern  reader  to  place  himself 
approximately  at  this  point  of  vantage  ;  for  if  the 
study  of  the  Inferno  and  the  Purgatorio  is  often  found 
to  be  a  disappointingly  inadequate  preparation  for 
reading  and  feeling  the  Paradiso^  on  the  other  hand 
the  comprehension  of  the  central  theme  of  the 
Paradisoy  even  though  it  be  only  on  its  intellectual 
side,  and  though  the  crowning  Cantica  itself  should 
never  fully  assert  its  power,  will  be  found  the  best 
of  all  preparations  for  apprehending  the  deeper 
meaning  and  the  deeper  beauties  of  Dante*s  con- 
ception and  treatment  of  hell  and  purgatory. 

viii 


PREFATORY     SYNOPSIS 

The  second  essay  is  concerned  with  kindred  but 
far  more  intricate  and  difficult  matter  ;  for  it  deals 
no  longer  with  the  organism  of  the  Comedy  and  the 
mutual  relations  of  its  parts,  but  with  the  relation  of 
Dante's  Minor  Works  to  the  conception  and  pur- 
pose of  the  Comedy  itself.  To  accomplish  the  one 
task  we  have  only  to  place  the  poet's  own  avowed 
and  conscious  purpose  in  the  light  of  the  current 
theological  conceptions  of  his  day ;  whereas  to 
succeed  in  the  other  we  must  trace  the  sometimes 
devious  steps  that  led  the  travellerfrom  the  beginning 
to  the  end  of  his  journey  even  when  he  himself  but 
dimly  realised  whither  they  were  taking  him.  Look- 
ing back  from  the  end  to  the  beginning  we  must 
survey  and  relate  to  each  other  all  the  intermediate 
stretches  of  the  path. 

Fortunately  the  chronological  succession  of  the 
works  that  directly  concern  our  inquiry  may  be  taken 
as  established  with  an  adequate  approximation  to 
general  assent.  The  Vita  Nuova  is  followed  by  the 
main  body  of  the  Canzoni^  so  far  as  they  are  not 
contemporary  with  it  and  immediately  related  to  its 
subject  matter.  Then  follow  the  Convivio^  the 
Monarchia,  and  the  Commedia,  Carefully  read  in 
their  order  these  works  reveal  one  line  at  least  of 
steady  advance  from  the  starting  point  to  the  goal. 
They  show  us  the  unbroken  development  of  Dante's 
attitude  towards  Christian  theology.  In  the  Vita 
Nuova  we  are  in  an  atmosphere  of  na'ive  and  un- 
questioning devoutness,  in  which  the  teaching  of  the 
Church  is  taken  for  granted.  In  this  phase  of  thought, 

ix 


PREFATORY     SYNOPSIS 

the  religion  of  ideal  love,  can  breathe  an  atmosphere 
kindred  to  its  own.   In  the  Canzoni  and  the  Convivio 
we  find  (with  other  matter)  widening  intellectual 
interests,  strengthening  powers  of  observation  and 
reflection,  and  a  missionary  ardour  to  enrich  the 
minds  and  direct  the  ideals  of  starved  or  misled 
humanity.    Here  Dante  not  only  remains  a  devout 
believer  but  is  becoming  an  ardent  and  systematic 
student  of  theology.    As  yet,  however,  his  interest 
in  the  divine  science  is  stimulated  chiefly  by  its 
reaction  upon  secular  ideals.   For  these  ideals,  when 
reverently  contemplated  in  the  light  of  their  analogies 
with  the  spiritual  order  of  things,  gain  a  depth  and  a 
consecration  that  bring  out  their  own  highest  beauty. 
To  refute  materialistic  conceptions  of  True  Nobility 
is  a  task  akin  to  that  of  S.  Thomas  Aquinas  when 
he  undertook  to  refute  the  Heathen.    To  carry  the 
truths  of  philosophy  out  of  the  cloister  and  the 
schools  into  the  busy  and  preoccupied  world  is  to 
imitate  the  Divine  mercy  which  condescends  to  give 
to  the  common  man,  by  revelation,  assurance  not 
only  of  truths  inaccessible  to  reason,  but  also  of  much 
that  it  is  indeed  within  the  range  of  the  human 
faculties  to  compass,  but  which  only  a  chosen  few 
would  have  time  or  opportunity  or  power  to  secure, 
or  even  to  test,  for  themselves.   And  indeed  what  is 
philosophy,  either  to  the  learned  or  to  the  simple, 
save  the  love  of  Wisdom  ?  And  was  it  not  Wisdom's 
self  that  came  down  to  earth  and  assumed  our  nature, 
to  teach  us  the  truth  ?    The  consecration  of  the 
Divine  example  then  shines  upon  the  teacher's  task. 


PREFATORY    SYNOPSIS 

These  thoughts  permeate  the  Convivio.  But  in 
that  work  Dante's  mind  is  still  dominated  by  the 
Ethnic  sages,  though  touched  with  the  glow  of 
Christian  devotion.  He  still  thinks  in  terms  of  the 
Aristotelian  distinction  between  the  practical  or  civic 
and  the  speculative  or  theoretical  life,  and  he  has  not 
yet  grasped  its  relations  to  the  ecclesiastical  and 
mystic  distinction  between  the  active  life  of  good 
works  and  the  contemplative  life  of  communion  with 
the  Deity. 

In  the  last  book  of  the  Convivio^  however,  there 
emerges  a  conception  of  the  Roman  Empire  as 
divinely  guided  and  inspired  which  must  be  regarded 
as  the  last  and  most  significant  of  the  reactions  of 
theology  upon  secular  ideals  which  we  have  to 
examine.  And  this  implicit  parallel  between  the 
temporal  and  the  spiritual  order  is  explicitly  de- 
veloped in  the  Monarchia  and  pervades  the  Comedy. 
In  the  Monarchia  the  recognition  of  a  Divine 
guidance  of  secular  forces  in  the  history  of  Rome, 
analogous  to  that  of  spiritual  forces  in  the  history  of 
Palestine  and  the  Church,  is  already  so  far  advanced 
that  the  exposition  by  Aquinas  of  the  need  of  a 
supreme  authority  in  matters  of  faith,  represented  by 
the  office  of  the  Pope,  can  be  elaborated  by  Dante  to 
support  the  authority  of  the  Emperor  as  the  supreme 
administrator  of  Roman  Law.  The  parallelism 
between  temporal  and  spiritual  things  is  now  fully 
worked  out  and  systematized  ;  the  Ethnic  distinction 
between  the  practical  and  the  theoretical  intelligence 
falls  into  the  background,  while  that  between  Reason 

xi 


PREFATORY    SYNOPSIS 

and  Revelation  comes  to  the  front ;  and  the  spiritual 
order  having  standardized  and  illuminated  the  poet's 
conception  of  the  temporal  order  is  now  drawing  his 
mind  more  and  more  directly  to  itself  for  his  own  sake. 
The  Monarchia  sets  forth  the  whole  framework  and 
scaffolding  of  the  Comedy  so  completely  that  it 
may  safely  be  trusted  as  the  '*  key  "  to  the  sym- 
bolism and  the  main  allegory  of  every  part  of  the 
Poem. 

This  clear  and  unbroken  line  of  progress  when 
once  distinctly  recognized  can  never  be  lost  sight  of 
or  obscured  ;  and  it  leaves  no  room  to  doubt  that 
the  Comedy  as  we  now  know  it  could  not  have  been 
conceived  in  its  general  outline  and  structure  until 
Dante's  mind  had  definitely  moved  away  from  the 
stage  of  development  represented  by  the  Convivio, 
and  had  reached  the  equilibrium  of  a  fuller  and  firmer 
synthesis  and  a  deeper  spiritual  insight. 

But  the  recognition  of  this  unbroken  line  of  pro- 
gress does  not  furnish  us  with  a  complete  solution 
of  the  complex  and  entangling  problems  presented 
by  the  Convivio,  from  which  I  have  provisionally  dis- 
engaged it.  In  the  Canzoni  that  lie  outside  the  cycle 
of  the  Fita  Nuova,  and  in  the  Convivio,  there  is  a 
distinct  movement  away  from  Dante's  self-dedica- 
tion to  the  task  of  raising  a  monument  to  Beatrice  ; 
and  moreover  there  are  sometimes  clear  and  some- 
times half-obliterated  traces  of  what  is  openly  con- 
fessed in  the  Comedy,  namely  a  period  in  Dante's 
life  during  which  he  had  not  cared  to  dwell  upon  his 

xii 


PREFATORY    SYNOPSIS 

memories  of  Beatrice  and  the  hopes  and  purposes 
associated  with  them,  because  his  current  interests 
and  standards  had  seemed  even  at  the  time  to  be 
aHen  from  such  memories.  In  the  retrospect  they 
seemed  deeply  unworthy  of  them. 

All  these  and  other  aspects  of  the  Convivio  have 
been  subjected  to  examination  in  the  second  essay  in 
this  book  ;  and  the  attempt  has  been  made,  by  first 
disentangling  and  then  recombining  them,  to  arrive 
at  a  psychologically  intelligible  account  of  how  that 
early  purpose  of  writing  of  Beatrice  **  what  ne*er  was 
writ  of  woman,"  after  seeming  to  fall  into  the  back- 
ground and  almost  into  oblivion  for  twenty  years, 
finds  its  transfigured  fulfilment  at  last  in  the  poem 
which  seeks  to  rescue  *'  those  living  in  this  mortal 
life  from  the  state  of  misery  and  to  bring  them  to  the 
state  of  bliss.** 

It  is  almost  exactly  a  hundred  years  since  the 
serious  attempt  to  present  Dante's  work  from  first 
to  last  as  an  intelligible  whole  was  initiated  by  the 
German  Dantist,  Witte  (then  some  twenty-two  or 
twenty-three  years  of  age),  in  the  first  of  the  brilliant 
scries  of  essays  which  may  be  said  to  have  dominated 
the  Dante  studies  of  the  last  century.  Those  who 
have  any  acquaintance  with  Witte's  work  will  sec  that 
it  is  impossible  for  mc  to  exaggerate  the  extent  of 
my  indirect  obligation  to  the  stimulus  he  gave  to 
Dante  scholarship.  At  the  same  time  they  will  under- 
stand that  his  placing  the  composition  of  the 
Monarchia  in  the  early  years,  before  Dantc*s  exile,  led 

xiii 


PREFATORY    SYNOPSIS 

to  what  I  cannot  but  regard  as  a  fatal  misconception 
of  the  CoHvivio, 

And  what  is  worse,  it  consequentially  led  Witte 
and  his  followers  to  an  allegorizing  interpretation  of 
the  Thirtieth  and  Thirty-first  Cantos  of  the  Pur- 
gatorio  which  would  altogether  mar  the  directness 
and  universality  of  their  appeal  and  would  persuade 
us  that  the  great  majority  of  readers  are  so  deeply 
moved  by  them  only  because  they  misunderstand 
them.  These  mists  and  obfuscations  of  the  most 
intensely  personal  utterances  of  the  poet  would  be 
finally  dispelled  if  the  attempt  here  made  to  recover 
the  links  between  the  Vita  Nuova  and  the  Comedy 
were  to  approve  itself,  in  the  main,  to  students  of 
Dante. 

• .  •  I  have  not  wished  to  interrupt  the  reading  of  the 
essays  by  frequent  indices,  but  have  given  continu- 
ously, at  the  foot  of  the  pages,  what  I  hope  will  be 
found  sufficiently  full  references  to  enable  students 
readily  to  verify  or  check  the  translations  and  para- 
phrases in  the  text.  In  the  prose  works  the  lines  re- 
ferred to  are  those  of  the  Oxford  Dante,  and  [in 
square  brackets]  the  sections  of  the  Florentine  Testo 
Critico,  1 92 1,  are  added. 

I  am  indebted  to  the  Rev.  R.  Travers  Herford 
for  the  correct  form  of  Rabbi  Hanina's  words  cited 
on  p.  V,  and  for  the  reference  to  Talmud  Babli, 
Taanith  7^,  where  they  are  recorded. 

n  ^A  P-  H.  W. 

Childret,  May  1922 

xiv 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS 


PAGE 

Prefatory  Synopsis 

vii 

Part  I.  The  Comedy 

The  Inferno  and  the  Purgatorio  in  the  light 

of  the  Paradiso 

3 

The  Beatific  Vision 

4 

The  Life  of  Innocence  and  the  Fall 

^5 

Hell 

34 

Purgatory  and  the  Recovered  Eden 

42 

Epilogue 

5^ 

Part  II.  The  Minor  Works 

The  Vita  Nuova 

59 

The  Canzoni 

70 

The  Convivio  in  its  Apologetic  Aspect 

80 

The  Convivio  in  its  Positive  Content 

93 

The  Monarchia  and  the  Comedy 

122 

Appendix  ;   Chronology  of  Dante's  Works 

H5 

rv 


THE    COMEDY 


EDMVNDO  GARRATT  GARDNER 

qvo  svperstite 
non  omnis  moriar 


'p-^%r  I 

THE    COMEDY 

(The  Inferno  and  the  Purgatorio  in  the  light 
of  the  Paradiso) 

The  poetic  splendour  of  the  Inferno  breaks  upon  the 
reader  as  soon  as  he  opens  the  first  pages  of  the 
Comedy  ;  but  it  is  often  obscured  by  historical 
allusions,  astronomical  circumlocutions,  and  terms 
of  mediaeval  science  or  philosophy,  which  darken 
and  at  times  quench  its  light.  These  obstacles,  how- 
ever, soon  begin  to  yield  to  patient  study,  and  what 
threatened  to  choke  the  flame  catches  fire  from  it 
and  in  its  turn  flings  light  into  every  corner  of  the 
world  in  which  Dante  lived  and  thought. 

Meanwhile,  earlier  or  later  as  the  case  may  be, 
the  reader  becomes  aware  of  an  underlying  purpose 
and  significance,  seldom  obtruded  but  always  pre- 
sent, that  gives  unity  and  direction  to  the  movement 
of  the  whole  poem,  breathing  into  it  a  vital  spirit 
of  its  own  and  appealing  for  its  interpretation  to  no 
other  lore  than  such  as  knowledge  of  ourselves  and 
observation  of  life  can  give  us. 

Presently,  when  we  grow  familiar  with  the  Purga- 
torio and  the  Paradiso^  the  InfernOy  in  spite  of  its 
direct  and  arresting  grip  upon  our  imagination, 
reveals  itself  as  a  beginning  that  must  be  read  in  the 
light  of  the  middle  and  the  end  if  we  are  to  under- 
stand it  truly  ;  and  we  begin  to  feel,  perhaps 
gropingly,  for  the  organic  relauon  of  the  parts  to  the 

3 


THE      COMEDY 

whole.  The  misleading  suggestion  will  probably 
present  itself  to  us,  at  this  point,  that  the  first 
Cantica  of  the  Comedy  is  the  foundation  on  which 
the  whole  structure  stands,  and  that  the  way  to 
heaven  lies  through  hell.  There  is  indeed  a  sense 
in  which  this  is  true,  but  we  can  never  rightly  grasp 
it  till  we  have  realized  the  far  deeper  sense  in  which 
it  is  false.  This  is  the  first  point  to  which  we  must 
turn  our  attention. 

I.     THE     BEATIFIC     VISION 

In  the  heaven  of  the  primum  mobile  Dante  sees  a 
single  point  of  intensest  Ught,  and  since  its  spaceless 
glory  represents  God  himself  Beatrice  tells  him 
that    "  from   that   point    all   Heaven   and  Nature 

^if  is  the  purpose  of  this  essay  to  show  how  the 
Comedy  itself,  in  its  animating  spirit  and  its  intimate 
structure,  "  depends  from  that  point." 

In  the  medieval  belief  both  angels  and  men  were 
created  by  the  divine  will  to  be  recipients  of  the 
divine  goodness  ;  and  the  life  of  heaven  consisted 
in  the  contemplation  by  these  recipient  spirits  ot 
the  primal  Goodness  that  created  them.  As  to 
the  difference  between  the  angelic  and  the  human 
nature  there  will  be  something  to  say  presently 
(p.  26),  but  we  must  note  at  once  that,  for  man, 

1  Da  quel  punto 

depende  il  cielo  e  tutta  la  natura. 

Paradiso  xxviii :  41  -ff- 

4 


THE     BEATIFIC     VISION 

the  life  of  Eden  as  a  stage  was  a  no  less  essential 
part  of  the  divine  purpose  than  the  life  of  Heaven 
as  the  goal.  Further,  the  whole  material  creation, 
including  the  revolving  heavens,  and  even  time  and 
space  themselves,  were  designed  with  reference  to 
this  earthly  life  of  man. 

The  Faradiso  deals  with  the  life  of  Heaven  and 
the  last  six  Cantos  of  the  Purgatorio  with  the  life  of 
Eden.  And  these  two,  with  all  that  they  involve, 
not  only  '*  depend  "  directly  from  God,  but  embody 
the  whole  of  the  primary  and  essential  purpose  of 
the  Creator  for  his  creatures. 

But  the  Fall  brought  with  it  a  warpmg  and  dis- 
tortion of  the  divine  pattern,  and  since  violent  dis- 
turbances of  order  are  to  be  understood  only  by 
reference  to  the  order  they  have  disturbed  it  is  but 
natural  that  the  most  intimately  characteristic  features 
of  Dante's  representations  alike  of  Hell  and  Purga- 
tory should  depend  upon  his  conception  of  the  state 
of  unfallen  man  and  of  his  heavenly  destiny.  The 
fixed  and  firm  attachment  therefore  is  from  above 
and  not  from  below,  and  the  structure  of  the  Comedy 
as  a  whole  **  depends  from  the  Faradiso  "  rather  than 
"  rests  on  the  Inferno^  Unless  we  have  formed  a 
clear  conception  of  what  Dante  meant  by  Heaven 
we  shall  only  dimly  understand  what  he  meant  by 
Hell  and  Purgatory. 

There  is  much  less  that  divides  Dante*s  intellectual 
conception  of  Heaven  from  the  received  teaching  of 
his  time  than  there  is  with  respect  to  the  correspond- 
ing conceptions  of  hell  and  purgatory  ;   and  conse- 

5 


THE     COMEDY 

quently  Dante  was  able  to  assume  that  his  readers 
would  start  with  the  same  presuppositions  as  to  the 
ultimate  goal  of  humanity  that  he  himself  accepted. 
However  much  deeper  his  realization  of  divine  and 
spiritual  things  might  be  than  that  of  the  average 
believer,  and  however  much  the  readers  of  the 
Faradiso  might  deepen  their  own  spiritual  experience 
and  realization  by  studying  it,  yet  their  intellectual 
belief  as  to  what  constitutes  the  heavenly  life  itself 
would  need  no  change.  They  began  their  reading 
of  the  Comedy,  as  we  do  not,  with  a  precisely 
formulated  belief  as  to  Heaven  that  agreed  with  that 
of  their  author. 

But,  on  the  other  hand,  hell  and  purgatory  had  a 
different  meaning  to  Dante  from  that  which  they 
bore  to  his  contemporaries,  and  this  precisely  because 
he  saw  them  in  closer  relation  to  heaven  than  they 
did.  Hell,  as  a  fact,  he  accepted  (not  without  inward 
protest)  from  authoritative  tradition  ;  but  what  he 
read  into  it  could  only  be  seen  in  the  light  of  heaven, 
and  therefore  could  not  be  seen  at  all  by  the  world- 
ling, or  by  the  damned  themselves.  And  purgatory 
was  not  to  Dante,  as  it  was  to  others,  a  painful  price 
paid  by  man  for  permission  to  enter  heaven,  but  a 
blessed  opportunity  allowed  him  of  bringing  himself 
into  tune  with  heaven.  These  modifications  of  the 
current  conceptions  were  forced  upon  him  as  neces- 
sarily involved  in  that  very  conception  of  heaven 
which  was  accepted  by  his  contemporaries  with  as 
little  question  as  by  himself;  and  it  is  under  this 
light  that  we  must  consider  them. 

6 


THE     BEATIFIC     VISION 

**  Seeing  God  in  his  essence  **  is  what  Dante  and 
his  contemporaries  meant  by  "  heaven."  Our  im- 
mediate task,  then,  is  to  arrive,  if  we  can,  at  an  exact 
conception  of  what  these  words  conveyed  to  the 
mind,  and  a  sympathetic  insight  into  the  feelings 
with  which  they  were  associated  on  the  Hps  of  the 
first  readers  of  the  Comedy.  We  must  be  content  to 
advance  slowly,  step  by  step,  and  the  first  and  easiest 
step  is  to  realize  that  "  seeing  "  is  to  be  understood 
very  definitely  and  strictly  in  the  metaphorical  sense 
in  which  we  say  that  we  "  see  "  a  truth,  or  that  we 
"  sec  "  a  friend's  thought,  purpose,  line  of  argument, 
or  unacknowledged  affections  or  aversions.  We 
must  check  not  only  our  thought,  but  our  imagina- 
tion, by  constantly  reminding  ourselves  that  in  this 
sense,  even  when  we  are  concerned  with  material 
things,  a  blind  man  can  see  what  he  sees  as  well  and 
as  truly  as  we  can,  though  he  cannot  see  all  the  things 
that  we  see.  He  cannot  see  that  one  colour  is  deeper 
than  another,  but  he  can  "  see  "  that  one  object  is 
harder  than  another  ;  and  he  can  see  a  truth  or  an 
argument  or  a  kind  or  hostile  intention  in  exactly  the 
same  sense  in  which  we  can  see  them.  To  "  see  " 
anything,  then,  in  our  sense  of  the  word,  is  to  have  a 
direct,  full,  and  clear  consciousness  of  it.  And  it  is 
in  this  sense  that  we  are  to  understand  the  expression 
**  seeing  God." 

The  next  step  is  to  consider  the  difference  between 
thus  **  seeing "  anything  **  in  its  essence,"  and 
seeing  or  knowing  it  only  through  its  effect  upon  us. 
To  know  a  thing  in  its  essence  meant  so  to  under- 

7 


THE     COMEDY 

Stand  its  inmost  being  as  to  see  how  all  its  manifesta- 
tions and  effects  must  necessarily  flow  from  it  be- 
cause they  are  involved  in  it ;  and  the  question  arises 
whether  we  can  in  this  sense  see,  or  know,  anything 
whatever  "  in  its  essence." 

Now,  on  this  subject  Dante  and  the  teachers  he 
followed  ^  deliberately  held  a  philosophy  concerning 
the  nature  and  limits  of  human  knowledge,  apart 
from  revelation,  which  easily  approves  itself  to  the 
average  common  sense  of  mankind,  though  by  no 
means  unchallenged  by  metaphysicians.  According 
to  this  philosophy  our  senses  give  us  notice  of  a 
material  world  that  actually  exists  outside  our  con- 
sciousness and  independently  of  it,  but  of  which  we 
can  have  no  kind  of  knowledge  except  in  and 
through  its  effects  upon  our  consciousness  through 
our  senses.  Of  what  it  is  "  in  itself"  or  "  in  its 
essence  "  we  can  have  no  knowledge  or  even  con- 
ception. 

Neither  can  we  have  any  knowledge  of  what  our 

^  S.  Thomas  Aquinas  (ti274)  is  the  teacher  from  whom  we  can 
best  gather  the  philosophical  and  theological  system  which  Dante 
presupposes  everywhere,  and  expressly  sets  forth  and  expounds  as 
occasion  rises.  On  its  purely  philosophical  side  this  system  is  based 
on  Aristotle's  teaching — developed,  however,  in  directions  of  which 
Aristotle  knew  nothing;  and  brought  into  relation  with  the  mystic 
and  dogmatic  inheritance  of  the  Church.  And  this  ecclesiastical 
tradition,  in  its  turn,  was  saturated  with  Platonic  influences.  Dante 
studied  Aristotle  at  first  hand,  though  (in  common  with  Aquinas 
himself  and  his  teacher  Albertus  Magnus)  he  read  him  in  Latin 
translations  only.  He  looks  at  Aristotle  essentially  from  the  point  of 
view  of  Aquinas,  but  he  is  not  a  slavish  disciple. 

8 


THE     BEATIFIC     VISION 

consciousness  is  "  in  itself,**  apart  from  its  content ; 
apart,  that  is,  from  the  impressions  received  from  the 
external  world  and  the  processes  in  our  minds  that 
they  provoke.  As  soon  as  the  sense  images  fall  upon 
the  mind  its  latent  powers  are  awakened  into  actuality 
and  we  enjoy  or  fear,  remember  or  desire,  as  many  of 
the  higher  animals  do  also.  But  what  is  this  mind  or 
consciousness  "  in  itself*  before  it  is  conscious  of 
anything  ?  In  itself,  and  before  it  comes  into  action, 
how  does  the  naked  capacity  for  abstracting, 
generalizing,  reasoning,  and  inferring,  which  is 
specific  to  man,  differ  from  the  naked  capacity  for 
receiving  sense  impressions  and  being  attracted  or 
repelled,  pleased  or  displeased,  which  is  shared  by 
other  animals  ?  We  cannot  answer  these  questions, 
and  therefore  we  can  understand  neither  external 
things  nor  the  organ  of  consciousness  **  in  them- 
selves.** And  neither  can  we  understand  the  con- 
nection between  our  consciousness  and  the  bodily 
organs  through  which  we  receive  our  impressions  of 
the  external  world,  of  which  they  themselves  are  a 
part.  We  can  know  none  of  these  things  therefore 
in  their  essential  being.  God  only,  the  Creator  and 
first  cause  of  all  things,  can  so  know  what  these 
things  are  in  their  inmost  nature  as  to  see  how  their 
relations  to  each  other  and  reactions  with  each  other 
follow  from  and  are  involved  in  what  they  are  **  in 
themselves,**  We  can  know  things  only  by  their 
effects,  as  apprehended  in  our  conscious  experiences. 
But  now  if  we  take  all  these  fundamental  connec- 
tions and  relations  as  we  find  them,  not  in  themselves, 

9 


THE     COMEDY 

but  in  their  united  and  reciprocal  action,  not  asking 
what  mind,  matter,  and  sense  organs  are  in  them- 
selves or  how  their  relations  rise  out  of  their  essence, 
but  simply  examining  the  resultant  impressions  and 
processes  or  goings  on  in  our  own  minds,  we  are  on 
very  different  ground.  We  find,  for  instance,  that 
out  of  the  data  supplied  us  by  the  senses  we  are 
capable  of  forming  certain  general  conceptions,  such 
as  the  ideas  of  "  whole  "  and  "  part."  We  find 
special  instances  of  a  whole,  with  its  parts,  in  the 
external  world  ;  but  the  generalized  conception  of 
**  whole  "  or  "  part  "  as  such  is  something  in  the 
mind  or  consciousness  ^  itself.  Moreover,  we  no 
sooner  form  these  general  conceptions  of  "  whole  ** 
and  "  part  '*  than  we  are  compelled  to  admit,  as  a 
general  self-evident  proposition  or  axiom,  that  the 
whole  is  greater  than  its  part :  that  is  to  say,  em- 
braces the  part  and  something  more.  There  are 
other  logical  and  mathematical  axioms  that  assert 
themselves  inevitably  as  soon  as  we  have  formed 

1  The  terms  consciousness,  mind,  and  soul  are  used  in  this  essay- 
as  the  convenience  of  the  context  suggests  without  any  careful  or 
significant  distinction.  Strictly,  consciousness  is  the  widest  and  most 
comprehensive  term.  Mind  suggests  a  special  region  or  aspect  of 
consciousness.  Soul  suggests  to  us  a  conscious  entity  that  has,  or  may 
have,  an  independent  existence  of  its  own ;  but  the  mediaeval 
thinker  would  speak  of  the  animal  or  vegetable  soul  with  no  such 
implication  or  even  suggestion,  using  the  term  as  the  mere  equivalent 
of  "  life  "  or  "  vitality."  Thus  for  him  to  speak  of  the  "  human 
soul  "  did  not  in  itself  imply  the  existence  of  a  psychic  entity,  though 
as  a  matter  of  fact  he  believed  (if  a  Christian)  the  human  soul  to  be 
such  an  entity. 

lO 


THE     BEATIFIC     VISION 

certain  elementary  generalizations  or  abstract  ideas. 
Then,  further,  we  find  that  these  axioms  involve 
many  unsuspected  consequences  which  we  may  be 
slow  to  perceive,  but  which  when  once  perceived 
assert  themselves  as  inevitably  involved  in  the 
axioms  themselves,  and  as  necessarily  flowing  from 
them.  Thus  the  whole  body  of  logical  truth  (in- 
cluding mathematics,  that  marvellous  erection  of 
specialized  logic  with  its  intense  intellectual  interest 
and  its  innumerable  practical  applications)  has  all 
been  evolved  in  the  progress  of  the  ages  out  of  the 
little  stock  of  axioms  that  everyone  capable  of  under- 
standing their  terms  must  inevitably  accept.  Any 
mathematical  or  logical  conclusion  that  cannot  be 
shown  to  be  involved  in  the  axioms  is  unstable  and 
liable  to  challenge. 

Now,  of  all  these  processes^  so  far  as  our  own  minds 
are  capable  of  them,  we  have  direct  knowledge  "  as 
they  are  in  themselves.'*  We  see  how  one  follows 
upon  another  because  it  is  already  virtually  contained 
in  it.  In  a  word,  we  can  find  their  source  and  germ 
and  can  trace  their  movement  "  from  inside  "  as  a 
development  and  unfolding  of  their  own  inmost 
nature. 

Note  here  that  in  these  general  or  abstract  con- 
ceptions our  minds  transcend  the  data  of  the  senses 
that  set  them  at  work.  For  we  can  neither  touch  nor 
smell  nor  see  a  mathematical  line  that  has  no 
breadth.  Nor  can  any  such  conception  as  "  necessary 
sequence  '*  or  *'  truth  *'  be  the  object  of  sense  per- 
ception. Of  these  abstractions  or  conceptions  in  our 

II 


THE     COMEDY 

own  minds  we  have  direct  consciousness  (whether 
vague  or  precise)  "  as  they  are."  But  what  is  the 
relation  in  this  matter  of  one  mind  to  another  ? 
To  begin  with,  since  I  have  no  direct  access  to  the 
processes  of  any  mind  but  my  own,  I  can  only  receive 
communications  from  another  mind,  or  even  know 
that  it  exists,  in  virtue  of  its  expressing  itself  through 
some  medium  that  can  act  upon  the  senses.^  Such  ex- 
pression I  interpret  on  the  analogy  of  my  own  in- 
ward experience.  The  whole  process  of  teaching  and 
learning  in  the  region  of  pure  thought  consists  in 
enabling  the  less  developed  mind  to  climb  back 
through  the  expressions  of  the  more  developed  mind 
to  an  understanding  of  the  actual  processes  internal 
to  that  mind  itself. 

How  different  it  would  be  if  we  had  some  "  sense  *' 
by  which  we  could,  up  to  the  measure  of  our  inherent 
capacity,  actually  "  see  "  the  processes  themselves 
of  the  more  developed  mind  with  the  same  direct 
consciousness  with  which  we  "  see  "  our  own  I  The 
teacher  would  always  know  exactly  where  the  pupil's 
mind  was  and  what  next  step  would  be  clear  to  it ; 
and  the  pupil  would  see  the  very  process  which  he 
was  invited  to  follow  in  the  mind  of  the  teacher,  not 

1  We  need  not  enter  upon  the  question  whether  any  approxima- 
tion to  such  direct "  thought  reading  "  is,  in  fact,  possible  to  us  ;  for 
Dante  and  his  contemporaries,  with  whose  philosophy  we  are  here 
concerned,  had  no  doubt  on  the  subject.  They  held  quite  firmly 
that  so  long  as  our  souls  remain  in  organic  relation  with  our  mortal 
bodies  we  can  have  no  direct  perception  of  the  contents  of  another's 
mind,  but  must  depend  upon  our  interpretation  of  such  indications 
as  can  reach  the  senses. 

12 


THE     BEATIFIC     VISION 

a  confused  and  distorted  image  of  it  crossed  by  his 
own  preconceived  ideas  and  blurred  by  finding  sand 
instead  of  wax  in  his  mind  to  receive  its  impress. 

But  as  things  are,  since  we  have  no  direct  insight 
into  the  processes  of  another  mind,  we  are  in  one 
respect  worse  off,  but  in  another  better,  with  regard 
to  another  mind  than  we  are  with  regard  to  material 
objects.  We  are  worse  off,  because  the  impress  of 
mind  upon  mind  can  never  be  direct  as  it  is  in  the 
case  of  the  impressions  made  on  the  senses  ;  but  we 
are  better  off,  because  as  far  as  we  can  indirectly  get 
at  the  processes  of  another  mind  we  may  hope,  by 
the  analogy  of  our  own  mind,  to  understand  them 
from  the  inside  and  as  they  are  "  in  themselves,'* 
whereas  our  perception  of  external  things,  however 
direct,  can  never  be  intimate. 

We  have  been  dealing  with  general  ideas  and  the 
propositions  that  concern  them  :  that  is  to  say,  with 
the  purely  intellectual  aspect  of  our  consciousness. 
But  we  are  directly  conscious  of  many  other  things 
than  these.  We  have  desires  and  impulses,  pleasant 
and  unpleasant  sensations  and  experiences,  hopes, 
fears,  and  purposes,  that  are  not  purely  intellectual. 
At  the  root  ot  all  this  is  the  fact  that  some  things 
attract  us  when  we  are  aware  of  them  and  rejoice  or 
satisfy  us  when  we  possess  or  experience  them,  while 
others  repel,  terrify,  or  distress  us.  From  the  ex- 
perience that  things  of  very  different  kinds  have  the 
power  of  attracting  us  we  form  the  general  concep- 
tion of  attractiveness. 


THE     COMEDY 

Now,  some  of  the  things  that  attract  us,  such  as 
food  for  example,  appeal  to  what  we  commonly 
mean  by  appetites  ;  but  in  Italian  and  in  late  or 
scholastic  Latin  a  thing  is  appetibile^  or  '*  the  object 
of  appetite,"  if  it  is  anything  that  we  "  go  for  "  for 
any  reason  or  with  any  part  of  our  nature.  Thus,  to 
desire  and  seek  {appetere)  truth  is  as  much  an 
"  appetite  "  as  if  truth  were  food.  If  a  man  "  hungers 
and  thirsts  after  righteousness  "  that,  too,  is  "  appe- 
tite ** ;  and  here  also  we  generalize  and  learn  to 
recognize  something  that  all  the  objects  of  our  desire 
have  in  common  and  which  is  some  form  of"  good.*' 
It  is  by  a  correct  instinct  that  we  call  both  things  to 
eat  and  virtuous  dispositions  by  the  same  name  of 
"good.^'i  They  both  have  the  same  quality  of 
**  appetibility.'*  To  the  normal  mind  they  are  all  of 
them  "  things  to  be  sought  **  in  due  time  and 
measure.  When  we  choose  one  thing  in  preference 
to  another  we  are  comparing  them  sub  specie  boni  : 
that  is  to  say,  we  pronounce  this  as  more  to  be  desired 
than  that  because  it  is  "  better."  So  this  act  of 
choice  is  an  expression  of  appetite,  but  appetite  that 
has  an  intellectual  element  in  it  inasmuch  as  it  is 
influenced  by  the  generalized  conception  of  good 
and  by  the  comparison  of  things,  otherwise  unlike 
each  other,  in  respect  of  their  "  goodness."  So 
the  mediaeval  thinkers  tell  us  that  the  act  of  choice 

^  Therefore,  whether  we  are  considering  material  or  immaterial 
things  we  must  be  jealously  on  our  guard  against  the  exclusively 
ethical  connotation  which  is  apt,  in  so  many  connections,  to  attach 
itself  to  the  word  "  good." 

14 


THE     BEATIFIC     VISION 

or  election  is  the  act  of  an  "  intellectual  appetite." 
It  is  only  when  the  passion  or  impulse  on  which  we 
act  is  so  overpowering  as  to  obliterate  the  conscious- 
ness of  any  alternative  that* our  action  ceases  to  be 
voluntary  and  to  obey  our  choice. 

But  we  all  know  too  well  that  the  things  that 
present  themselves  as  desirable,  or  good,  do  not 
always  turn  out  to  be  so  ;  and  therefore  it  is  only 
good  for  us  to  get  what  we  want  when  what  we  want 
is  really  good.  Hence  there  are  two  branches  of 
wisdom  in  this  matter.  The  one  consists  in  having 
what  would  now  be  called  a  true  scale  of  values : 
that  is  to  say,  in  recognizing  what  are  the  truly  good 
and  best  objects  of  desire,  and  in  what  proportions, 
and  what  are  the  true  relations  of  secondary  and 
subordinate  to  primary  and  supreme  objects  of 
desire.  The  other  consists  in  having  sound  judge- 
ment as  to  the  means  of  getting  the  things  that  we 
desire,  whatever  they  may  be. 

Returning  now  to  the  question  of  the  nature  of 
our  knowledge  or  understanding  of  another  man's 
mind,  we  may  repeat  that  with  our  present  powers 
such  knowledge  or  understanding  can  never  be 
direct,  but  it  may  be  in  various  degrees  intimate ;  for 
we  understand  a  man's  reasoning  in  so  far  as  we 
understand  his  axioms  and  the  processes  (sound  or 
fallacious)  by  which  he  deduces  his  conclusions  from 
them.  And  we  understand  his  actions  and  his  feel- 
ings so  far  as  we  understand  his  scale  of  values,  his 
physical  capacities  and  sensations,  the  degree  of  his 
insight  into  the  relation  of  means  to  ends,  and  the 

15 


THE     COMEDY 

extent  to  which  his  intelligence  is  clouded  by  his 
passions.  Note,  too,  that  both  as  to  action  and  as  to 
thought  we  may  learn  by  observation  to  expect  and 
reckon  upon  conduct  and  mental  processes  in  an- 
other which,  in  the  sense  explained,  we  cannot 
be  said  to  **  understand,**  because  we  cannot 
find  the  key  to  them  in  our  own  experience  or 
feelings.  Of  such  we  have  a  scientific  knowledge 
from  the  outside,  but  no  **  understanding  "  from 
within. 

To  sum  up,  then,  the  whole  course  both  of  direct 
instruction  and  of  what  we  call  the  "  influence  of  a 
personality,"  consists  in  one  soul  being  brought, 
by  impressions  made  upon  the  senses,  to  an  (indirect 
and  imperfect)  insight  into  the  processes  within 
another  soul. 

But  how  if,  instead  of  having  to  rely  upon  in- 
ference (however  certain,  spontaneous,  and  even 
unconscious  it  may  in  some  cases  be),  we  really  had 
the  power,  about  which  we  so  often  speculate,  of 
direct  vision  of  another's  thoughts  and  emotions 
and  the  whole  sum  of  the  processes  in  his  conscious- 
ness I  How  if  we  could  really  "  see  **  another  soul 
in  all  its  vital  movements  and  experiences  I  Now, 
this  is  exactly  the  power  which,  according  to  the 
mediaeval  belief,  the  disembodied  souls  of  the  blessed 
will  actually  acquire  (and  retain  when  reunited  to  the 
glorified  body  of  the  resurrection)  and  which  the 
angels  enjoyed,  by  their  very  nature,  from  the  first. 
Each  such  soul  or  angelic  spirit  can,  up  to  the 
measure  of  its  primal  and  inherent  endowment,  read 

i6 


THE     BEATIFIC     VISION 

the  consciousness  of  every  other  as  directly  as  it  can 
read  its  own. 

But  there  is  more  than  this.  We  have  seen  that 
we  do  not  know  or  understand  even  our  own  souls 
"  in  themselves  **  (p.  9).  If  we  really  knew  them 
in  their  essential  being  how  could  philosophers  have 
discussed  for  ages  whether  the  soul  is  material  or 
immaterial  in  its  nature,  whether  or  not  any  of  its 
functions  are  independent  of  bodily  organs,  whether 
by  its  nature  it  is  mortal  or  immortal  ?  But  according 
to  Dante's  teachers,  angels,  unlike  men,  do  actually 
**  know  themselves,**  and  therefore  by  their  very 
nature  know  God,  not  indeed  in  himself,  but  through 
his  highest  and  noblest  effects.  For  they  have  direct 
knowledge  not  only  of  themselves  in  their  inmost 
essence  and  constitution,  but  of  each  other  also. 
And  a  like  knowledge  of  themselves,  of  each  other, 
and  of  the  angelic  spirits  will  be  conferred  upon  the 
souls  of  the  blessed. 

Let  us  try  to  realize  something  of  what  this  would 
mean.  Not  only  would  our  initiation  into  the 
processes  of  another's  mind  become  swift  and  secure 
and  be  freed  from  all  obscurities  and  misconceptions 
of  expression,  but  there  would  be  a  complete  re- 
moval of  all  possibility  of  confusion  between  the 
limitations  imposed  upon  our  own  thoughts  by  the 
constitution  of  our  minds  and  those  imposed  by  their 
present  state.  There  are,  as  we  have  seen,  certain 
axioms  or  propositions  that  we  cannot  conceive  as 
being  other  than  true.  But  a  proposition  may  be 
axiomatic  to  one  mind  which  to  another  mind  is 

17  B 


THE     COMEDY 

manifestly  untrue.  Thus  (to  borrow  and  elaborate 
an  illustration  from  Aristotle),  to  the  mind  of  a 
mathematically  uneducated  person  the  proposition 
that  the  side  and  the  diagonal  of  a  square  are  in- 
commensurable conveys  at  first  no  meaning  and  then 
becomes  so  astonishing  that  it  seems  impossible  to 
understand  how  it  can  possibly  be  true.  That  it  is 
in  some  sense  true  can  only  be  uncomprehendingly 
accepted  on  authority.  To  the  mathematically 
educated  mind,  on  the  other  hand,  it  would  involve  a 
flat  contradiction  to  suppose  that  the  two  lines  are 
commensurable.  Thus,  what  one  mind  cannot  con- 
ceive as  being  so  another  cannot  conceive  as  being 
other  than  so. 

And  this  need  not  be  a  difference  of  constitution 
between  the  two  minds,  for  the  one  may  well 
be  capable  of  being  brought  to  the  fuller  insight 
of  the  other.  Thus  Aristotle  himself  took  it  as 
axiomatic  that  if  one  body  were  twice  as  heavy  as 
another  it  would  fall  through  space  twice  as  fast. 
But  afterwards  Galileo  first  saw  that  this  coul^  not 
be  true  and  then  demonstrated  to  the  incredulous  that 
it  was  not.  And  this  not  because  his  mind  was 
differently  constituted  from  Aristotle's,  for  Aristotle 
would  have  reached  Galileo's  position  in  a  moment 
had  anyone  been  at  hand  to  direct  his  mind  to 
certain  obvious  facts  and  principles.  Thus,  if  we  had 
direct  access  to  our  own  souls  and  to  other  and  higher 
souls  than  our  own  we  could  never  fall  into  that 
"  illusion  of  incapacity ''  which  so  often  paralyzes 
effort  and  checks  progress.   We  should  never  think 

i8 


THE     BEATIFIC     VISION 

ourselves  constitutionally  incapable  of  learning  things 
when  all  that  was  really  wanting  was  to  see  our 
teacher's  thought  behind  his  words  or  even  without 
words,  and  to  be  willing  to  try  to  follow  it.  We 
might  indeed  see  in  spirits  of  greater  power  than 
our  own  processes  that  we  could  not  follow,  but 
within  the  range  of  our  actual  capacity  it  would  be 
impossible  for  us  to  cling  hopelessly  and  helplessly 
to  false  axioms  or  false  deductions  which  we  were, 
in  fact,  constitutionally  capable  of  seeing  through,  if 
once  we  had  seen  the  truth  in  another's  mind.  Our 
minds  might  grow,  and  until  they  had  reached  the 
limit  of  their  capacity  they  would  grow  ;  but  though 
there  would  be  teaching  there  would  be  no  perplexed 
and  bewildered  learners  and  no  vexed  or  baffled  or 
disappointed  teachers.  Seeing  a  mind  at  work  on  a 
level  too  high  for  our  comprehension  would  provoke 
wonder  and  admiration,  but  could  never  create 
confusion. 

And  the  analogue  of  all  this  in  matters  of  emo- 
tion and  choice,  or  in  the  grading  of  values, 
would  be  equally  true.  "  We  needs  must  love 
the  highest  when  we  sec  it,"  and  if  we  saw 
another's  soul  we  should  see  all  things  under  its 
scale  of  values ;  and  so  far  as  our  souls  were 
capable  of  right  estimates  we  could  not  love  the 
lower  better  than  the  higher  when  the  higher  had 
once  been  seen. 

As  we  are  now  constituted  every  process  of  in- 
fluencing or  training  of  one  mind  by  another  must 
consist  in  getting  the  one  mind,  indirectly  and  im- 

19 


THE    COMEDY 

perfectly,  through  media  and  by  inference,  into 
some  kind  of  understanding  of  what  is  in  the  other; 
and  under  such  influencing  and  training  we  make 
our  way  to  such  truth  of  insight  and  feeUng  as  we 
attain  ;  but  what  if  we  could  really  "  see  **  the 
thoughts  and  feelings  of  a  Shakespeare  or  a  Newton, 
and  lay  their  insight  and  their  scheme  of  values  side 
by  side  with  our  own  !  Could  we  ever  live  and  think 
on  the  old  levels  again  ?  And  in  matters  of  right 
and  wrong,  or  of  noble  and  ignoble  motive,  if  a  word 
from  a  friend  or  even  the  thought  of  him  or  a  chance- 
struck  sentence  or  line  in  a  book  can  often  startle  us 
into  a  sudden  insight  and  a  rectification  of  moral 
values,  what  if  we  could  actually  "  see  "  the  higher 
scheme  that  we  can  only  feel  after  in  semi-darkness  1 
Surely,  even  though  our  lives  under  stress  of  passion 
should  fail  to  conform  themselves  to  the  higher 
insight  (even  as  they  fail  to  conform  themselves  to 
such  ideals  as  we  have  actually  won  through  to), 
yet  their  compelling  and  persuasive  force  could 
never  be  escaped  nor  could  we  ever  find  refuge  from 
them  in  the  belief  that  we  were  constitutionally  in- 
capable of  seeing  and  feeling  what  we  had  actually 
seen  and  felt. 

So  much  for  conceivable  insight  into  created 
spirits.  But  what  if  we  could  **  see  '*  God  himself? 
Should  we  not  then  see  things  in  their  absolute 
truth  and  in  their  absolute  values  ?  And  would 
it  not  be  impossible  to  be  drawn  aside  from 
that  vision  of  the  perfect  whole  to  any  frag- 
mentary    object     of    bewildered    and     distorting 

20 


THE     BEATIFIC     VISION 

"  appetite  "  ?  ^    That  surely  were  Heaven.    But  may 
such  a  thing  be  ? 

A  recapitulation  at  this  point  will  show  us  at  once 
what  progress  we  have  made  and  how  far  we  still  are 
from  the  goal.  We  can  indirectly  infer  from  outward 
signs  the  inward  processes  of  other  minds  because 
we  believe  them  to  be  analogous  to  those  we  are 
directly  conscious  of  in  ourselves.  We  can  attach 
some  meaning  to  the  idea  of  having  a  direct  per- 
ception of  those  processes  in  another  mind  because 
we  actually  have  direct  perception  of  things  analo- 
gous to  them  in  our  own.  We  can  perhaps  in  some 
sort  imagine  new  powers  which  would  enable  us  to 
know  our  own  souls  in  their  intimate  and  essential 
being,  and  if  we  could  do  that  might  we  not  be  able 
to  have  a  direct  knowledge  of  other  souls  like  our 
own  ?  Nay,  if  there  are  angelic  spirits  whose  intelli- 
gence is  that  of  a  created  and  limited  consciousness, 
and  is  so  far  analogous  to  our  own,  might  we  not 
conceive  it  possible  that  we  should  have  some  direct 
knowledge  of  them  too,  which,  in  spite  of  their 
loftier  and  intenser  insight,  should  be  true  up  to  the 
limit  of  our  powers  of  comprehension  ? 

But  why  have  I  constantly  introduced  the  qualifi- 

*  A  quella  luce  tal  si  diventa, 

che  volgersi  da  lei  per  altro  aspetto 
h  impossibil  che  mai  si  consenta; 
Pcr6  che  il  ben,  ch*  h  del  volere  objetto, 
tutto  s*  accoglie  in  lei ;  e  fuor  di  quella 
h  defettivo  ci6  ch*  h  li  perfetto. 

ParaJiso  ixxii  i :  i  oo- 105. 
21 


THE     COMEDY 

cation  "  up  to  the  measure  of  our  inherent  capacity  " 
in  expounding  Dante's  philosophy  ?  What  exactly 
does  it  mean  and  what  does  it  involve  ?  It  was  the 
firm  belief  both  of  Dante  and  his  teachers  that 
whereas  every  human  soul  had  certain  faculties 
(whether  in  realized  or  only  in  potential  activity), 
such  as  the  power  of  making  comparisons  and 
generalizations,  grasping  axiomatic  truths,  deducing 
consequences  from  them,  experiencing  and  com- 
paring attractions  and  repulsions,  conceiving  desires 
and  selecting  means  by  which  to  fulfil  them,  yet  in 
different  individuals  these  powers  were  possessed  in 
different  degrees  of  sensitiveness  and  strength. 
Though  of  the  same  essential  quality  and  character 
in  all,  these  powers  were  inherently  and  ultimately 
capable  of  higher  development  in  one  than  in  an- 
other. Thus,  though  an  axiom  might  be  equally 
obvious  and  certain  to  two  minds  it  might  be  in- 
definitely richer  in  its  implied  content  and  so  more 
fertile  to  one  of  them  than  to  the  other.  And  this 
not  only  by  circumstance,  but  by  inherent  capacity. 

So,  too,  if  new  powers  should  be  conferred  on  the 
soul  after  death,  such  as  the  power  of  direct  vision  of 
spiritual  essences,  these  powers  also  would  be  as- 
signed in  different  degree  to  different  individuals. 
And  in  either  case,  as  there  are  limits  of  degree  for 
the  individual  so  there  are  limits  of  quality  proper 
to  the  race  of  men,  and  to  the  nature  of  each  angelic 
being,  or  common  to  all  the  created  intelligence  as 
such. 

It  is  with  the  limitations  of  created  intelligence 

22 


THE     BEATIFIC     VISION 

as  such  that  we  are  now  concerned  ;  for  all  the  pro- 
cesses and  all  the  creatures  which  we  have  even 
imagined  ourselves  to  know  by  direct  access  to  their 
essential  being  lie  within  the  limits  of  created  con- 
sciousness.  Of  matter  "in  itself**  we  cannot  even 
conceive  ourselves  as  having  intimate  knowledge, 
because  it  is  not  consciousness  ;  nor  of  God  **  in 
himself,*'  because  he  is  not  created.  To  the  supreme, 
the  unconditioned,  the  self-sustained,  the  eternal 
first  cause,  as  he  exists  essentially  in  and  to  himself, 
our  own  created  intelligence  gives  us  no  access  by 
any  kind  of  analogy.  To  **  see  God  **  would  be  not 
to  receive  some  new  power  in  expansion  of  our 
human  nature,  but  to  break  out  beyond  the  bounds  of 
**  created  consciousness  **  itself,  whether  human  or 
angelic.  It  would  make  us  partakers  of  the  divine  crea- 
tive Life  itself:  for  God  alone  can  know  himself. 

"  Can  this  be  }  "  And  if  so,  "  how  can  it  be .''  *'  and 
"what  must  it  be.*^**  To  these  questions  I  must  sim- 
ply try  to  give  the  answers  expressly  elaborated  by 
Aquinas  and  everywhere  assumed  by  Dante.  My 
task  as  an  expounder  extends  no  further. 

Can  it  be  :  It  must  be.  Philosophy  and  natural 
religion,  confirmed  by  revelation,  tell  us  that  the 
Creator  will  not  thwart  the  essential  nature  of  his 
creature.  Now,  the  longing  for  conclusive  blessed- 
ness and  the  unquenchable  sense  that  such  blessed- 
ness is  not  a  mere  dream,  but  an  actual  possibility, 
belong  to  the  essential  nature  of  man.  Man  there- 
fore is  destined  to  attain  it ;  and  nothing  short  of 
**  dciformity,**  or  likeness  to  God  in  our  own  inward 

23 


THE     COMEDY 

being,  will  give  it.  It  must  be  God's  will,  therefore, 
that  man  should  share  his  essential  being. 

"  How  "  then  can  it  be  ?  To  human  or  angelic 
nature  it  is,  in  itself,  impossible  to  be  or  to  become 
deiform,  but  to  God  all  things  are  possible  ;  and  by- 
impressing  his  very  self,  essentially,  upon  the  created 
spirit  he  can  so  transfuse  it  with  the  **  light  of  glory  " 
(lumen  gloria)  that  **  in  that  light  it  can  see  the  light.'* 
For  when  assimilated  to  the  essential  being  of  God 
it  can,  up  to  the  measure  of  the  initial  capacity 
divinely  bestowed,  see  God  as  he  sees  himself. — 
"  Up  to  its  measure."  For  the  infinite  must  remain 
in  infinite  excess  of  the  finite.  But  the  assimilation 
within  that  measure  may  be  perfect  and  may  con- 
stitute, to  that  spirit,  the  absolute  fulfilment  of  its 
longing  for  perfect  vision  and  for  perfect  blessedness. 

"  What  "  will  it  be  }  The  direct  vision  of  perfect 
power,  wisdom,  love  ;  of  perfect  goodness,  truth, 
beauty  ;  not  as  abstractions  or  ideals  of  our  minds, 
but  as  the  very  being  of  God,  who  is  Being's  self. 

By  assimilation  to  the  divine  being  and  participa- 
tion therein  the  blessed  spirit  sees  God  as  he  sees 
himself,  and  sees  all  things  and  all  beings  as  God 
sees  them  :  in  their  perfect  and  untarnished  truth 
and  beauty.  There  is  no  room  here  for  accepting  or 
rejecting.  Seeing  God,  the  spirit  sees  all  things 
under  God's  own  values,  and  is  caught  into  the  glory 
of  his  ineffable  love  and  bliss.  Standing  thus  at  the 
fontal  source  of  all  being,  the  blessed  spirit  sees  the 
material  as  well  as  the  spiritual  side  of  creation  in  its 
Psalm  xixv  :   lo  [A.V.  xxxvi :  9]. 

24 


EDEN     AND     THE      FALL 

intrinsic  nature,  even  as  the  Creator  sees  it.  Time, 
space,  and  causation  are  no  longer  conditions  that 
bind  the  thought  and  experience  upon  which  they 
are  imposed,  but  acts  of  the  Creative  Mind  itself, 
above  which  that  mind,  with  all  that  it  has  called 
into  fellowship  with  itself,  stands  supreme.  God  and 
his  elect  see  the  universe  and  love  it  not  in  fragments 
but  as  a  whole,  not  as  a  stream  of  effects  which  they 
must  stem  in  order  to  reach  up  towards  the  first 
cause,  but  as  an  utterance  flowing,  as  by  force  of  its 
intrinsic  and  divine  fitness  and  glory,  from  the 
central  Consciousness  itself  within  which  they  stand 
and  by  which  they  are  compassed. 

II.  THE  LIFE  OF  INNOCENCE  AND 
THE  FALL 

Our  next  step  must  be  to  try  to  understand  the 
mediaeval  conception  of  the  life  of  man  on  earth  as  it 
was  before  the  Fall,  and  would  have  remained  had 
Adam  not  fallen.  Dante  tells  us  that  collective 
humanity  is  not  only  a  whole  consisting  of  parts, 
but  also  a  part  of  a  greater  whole.  And  this  is 
equally  true  of  each  individual.  It  follows  that  a 
twofold  harmony  is  needed  if  man*s  life  is  to  conform 
in  all  respects  to  the  purpose  of  his  Creator.  Not  only 
must  the  varied  appetites,  faculties,  and  desires  upon 
which  man's  life  is  built  work  in  perfect  harmony 
and  balance  with  each  other,  so  that  there  may  be  no 
internal  warp  or  discord  within  him,  but  also  he 
Monarchia  I.  vii. 

2^ 


/ 


THE     COMEDY 

must  duly  relate  this  internally  harmonious  life  of  his 
to  the  greater  whole  of  which  it  is  a  part.  As  to  this 
latter  harmony  the  scholastic  philosophy  and  theo- 
logy start  from  the  assumption  that  the  goodness  of 
God,  the  infinite  and  absolute  Perfection,  must  flow 
out  in  some  form  of  self-expression  or  self-utterance 
in  and  to  beings  that  can  share  the  joy  of  conscious 
existence.  But  since  a  complete  expression  of  the 
Infinite  is  impossible  (except  as  expressed  by  and  to 
itself)  variety  of  expression  must  compensate,  as  best 
may  be,  for  the  inherent  limitations  of  receptive 
susceptibility  on  the  part  of  the  created  intelligences 
to  whom  the  revelation  is  to  be  conveyed.  So  when 
God  uttered  himself  in  creation  he  called  into  being 
countless  hosts  of  angels,  all  pure  spirit  like  him- 
self, and  all  endowed  with  direct  spiritual  vision 
enabling  them  to  see  themselves  and  each  other  in 
their  essence,  and  thus  to  see  in  themselves  their 
Creator  as  manifested  in  his  highest  effects.  So  far 
their  own  nature  went,  but  (as  we  have  seen)  it  was 
only  by  a  miraculous  act  from  outside  their  nature 
that  they  could  be  brought  to  and  sustained  in  the 
direct  "  vision  of  God  "  ;  and  Satan  and  the  rebel 
angels,  not  brooking  even  an  instantaneous  proba- 
tion, fell  in  their  pride  "  unripe  ":  that  is  to  say, 
without  ever  reaching  the  consummation  to  which 
the  faithful  angels  were  instantaneously  and  irre- 
vocably called.  Of  these  immaterial  beings,  con- 
firmed in  bliss,  every  single  one  had  his  own  proper 
vision  of  God — and  therefore  his  own  quality  of 
knowledge,  of  love,  and  of  joy — so  distinctive  as  to 

26 


EDEN     AND      THE     FALL 

make  him  not  only  a  different  individual,  but  of  a 
different  species  from  all  the  rest.  Yet  each  saw  God 
truly  as  he  is  :  in  his  essence,  not  merely  in  his  effects. 
Even  this  unimaginable  variety  of  self-com- 
munication, however,  did  not  exhaust  God's  self- 
utterance  in  calling  conscious  beings  into  participa- 
tion of  his  joy.  He  willed  further  to  create  an  order 
of  beings  who,  unlike  the  angels,  should  grow 
through  a  succession  of  experiences  and  a  continuous 
development  to  the  full  realization  of  their  natural 
powers  instead  of  reaching  them  at  a  bound  in 
accomplished  fullness  ;  and  this  order  of  beings  was 
not  all  to  be  created  simultaneously,  as  the  angels 
were,  but  was  to  spring  from  a  single  pair  and  was 
to  multiply  through  the  ages.  Moreover,  the  suc- 
cessions and  limitations  of  their  development  were 
to  be  controlled  by  the  conditions  of  time  and  space 
in  contradistinction  from  the  timeless  and  spaceless 
existence  of  pure  spirit.  So  man  was  to  be  a  material 
as  well  as  a  spiritual  being.  His  soul  was  to  be  so 
associated  with  a  physical  body  as  to  receive  all  the 
materials  for  its  full  development  through  the  gates 
of  the  senses.  This  human  soul  or  vital  principle 
had,  indeed,  as  we  have  already  seen  (p.  1 1),  latent 
powers  which  could  ultimately  transcend  the  limits 
of  the  material  organs  with  which  it  was  associated 
and  reach  by  abstraction  to  a  realm  of  immaterial 
truth,  though  not  to  the  direct  perception  of  im- 
material beings  ;  and  these  powers  may  be  thought 
of  as  constituting  a  **  mind  **  or  **  spirit  **  which  is 
the  highest  aspect  of  the  human  **  life  '*  or  **  soul,** 

27 


THE     COMEDY 

and  which  differentiates  it  from  the  life  or  soul  of  the 
plants  and  lower  animals.  But  the  matter  on  which 
these  higher  powers  were  to  exercise  themselves, 
and  above  which  they  were  to  rise,  must  all  be  sup- 
plied by  the  senses.  It  was  from  sense  data  that  all 
else  must  be  developed. 

Adam  himself  received  his  natural  powers  and 
his  full  stores  of  knowledge  instantaneously  at  his 
creation  ;  but  this  was  a  personal  gift,  not  a  part  of 
the  human  nature  he  was  to  transmit  to  his  posterity. 
Moreover,  though  he  received  his  knowledge  miracu- 
lously it  was  natural,  not  miraculous,  knowledge 
that  he  received  :  just  as  in  the  Gospel  though  the 
man  born  blind  received  his  sight  miraculously  it 
was  natural  sight  that  he  so  received. 

We  must  not,  however,  judge  of  human  nature  as 
it  was  created  in  Eden  altogether  from  human  nature 
even  at  its  best  and  inmost  as  we  know  it  now. 
Adam  had,  and  his  descendants  would  have  had,  not 
only  (as  we  shall  see)  a  more  harmonious  nature, 
but  quicker  spiritual  perceptions  and  a  more  direct 
knowledge  both  of  self,  of  fellow-man,  and  of  God 
(though  not  in  his  essence)  than  we  can  now  have  on 
earth.  Had  Adam  not  fallen  the  normal  education 
and  development  of  man  from  infancy  to  maturity 
would  have  had  that  sweet  and  frictionless  move- 
ment, without  wavering  or  error  in  its  progress,  that 
we  have  imagined  as  flowing  from  a  power  of  direct 
vision  of  the  processes  of  another  mind  (p.  12). 
Moreover,  man  would  normally  have  inherited  in 
the  earthly  life  certain  revealed  truths  inaccessible 

28 


EDEN     AND      THE     FALL 

to  the  human  faculties  even  in  their  unfallen  state ; 
and  then,  after  the  fullest  fruition  of  the  perfect 
earthly  life,  man,  without  the  death  of  the  body  or  the 
provisional  isolation  of  the  soul,  would  have  passed 
from  the  earthly  to  the  heavenly  life.  His  soul  trans- 
muted by  the  **  light  of  glory  **  and  his  body  trans- 
formed into  a  perfect  and  unresisting  instrument  of 
his  soul,  he  would  have  "  seen  God,'*  seen  the  uni- 
verse as  God  sees  it,  and  entered  the  eternal  life. 

Man,  then,  has  his  own  proper  place  in  the  divine 
scheme,  and  the  fall  of  the  angels,  even  if  it  was  the 
occasion,  was  not  the  deepest  cause  or  reason  of  his 
creation,  for  he  was  an  integral  part  of  the  divine 
self-utterance,  which  would  not  have  been  complete 
without  him.  The  whole  order  of  the  material 
creation  exists  for  the  sake  of  man,  and  for  his  sake 
only.  Its  function  is  threefold  :  to  sustain  his  body, 
to  educate  and  develop  his  spirit,  and  to  give  him 
the  material  for  that  moulding  and  artistic  self- 
utterance  which  is  his  nearest  analogue  to  the  divine 
privilege  of  creation. 

Now  that  we  see  how  far  the  whole  scheme  of 
God*s  self-revelation  extends  beyond  humanity  we 
can  understand  more  clearly  what  is  meant  by  the 
distinction  between  the  inward  order  of  man's 
powers  and  appetites  among  themselves  and  his 
conformity  to  the  greater  order  of  which  his  whole 
being  is  in  its  turn  a  part. 

Now,  since  man,  even  in  his  first  perfection,  could 
not  grasp  the  whole  purpose  of  God,  there  was  this 
difference  between  his  ordering  of  his  life  in  itself 

29 


THE     COMEDY 

and  his  ordering  of  it  with  reference  to  the  whole 
creative  plan,  namely,  that  whereas  all  the  elements 
of  the  one  order  were  within  the  range  of  his  own 
direct  perception  he  had  to  take  those  of  the  other 
on  trust.  So  when  God  made  Adam  and  Eve  and  set 
them  in  Eden  they  realized  the  perfect  balance  of 
their  powers,  as  applied  to  the  totality  of  their  own 
fruition  of  life  ;  but  their  relation  to  God's  wider 
plan  was  beyond  their  ken,  and  with  respect  to  this 
conformity  a  command  must  take  the  place  of  the 
spontaneous  following  of  unerring  impulse. 

Dante's  own  account  of  the  spontaneous  internal 
harmony  of  the  life  of  unfallen  man  is  placed  by  him 
on  the  lips  of  Virgil  when  the  pilgrims  have  actually 
reached  the  Garden  of  Eden,  or  Earthly  Paradise, 
itself,  at  the  summit  of  the  Purgatorial  Mount  in 
the  southern  hemisphere.  "  Thy  will,"  he  says  to 
Dante,  "  is  free,  upright,  and  sound.  It  were  a  fault 
not  to  act  according  to  its  prompting."  ^  This  is  the 
state  described  by  Wordsworth  : 

When  love  is  an  unerring  light 
And  joy  its  own  security. 

Aquinas  gives  a  more  elaborate  and  analytical  ac- 
count of  this  primal  state  of  man,  but  it  is  in  complete 
accord  with  the  utterances  of  the  poets.  He  tells  us 
that  Adam  and  Eve  had  all  the  natural  appetites  and 
desires  both  of  the  senses  and  of  the  mind,  and  that 

1  Libero,  dritto  e  sano  h  tuo  arbitrio, 
e  fallo  fora  non  fare  a  sue  senno. 

Purgatorio  xxvii :   140  sq. 

30 


EDEN    AND     THE    FALL 

the  fineness  of  their  spiritual  and  material  percep- 
tions made  their  enjoyment  far  keener  than  ours 
can  be,  but  that  all  impulses  were  so  controlled  by 
reason  as  never  to  press  for  any  gratification  which 
would  disturb  the  full  harmony  and  balance  of  their 
being.  In  this  description  we  must  not  be  misled  by 
the  associations  of  the  word  "reason,"  for  with  the 
Schoolmen  it  does  not  stand  merely  for  the  cold 
ratiocinative  faculty  as  opposed  to  emotion.  Here 
again  Wordsworth  comes  to  our  aid,  with  his  phrase  ; 

Yea,  all  the  adamantine  holds  of  truth 
By  reason  built,  or  passion,  which  itself 
Is  highest  reason  in  a  soul  sublime. 

Wc  are  to  imagine  the  appetites,  then,  not  as  con- 
trolled by  something  outside  themselves  that  re- 
strains them,  so  much  as  inspired  by  an  inward  sense 
of  the  harmony  in  which,  and  in  which  alone,  each 
finds  its  full  self-realization. 

So  Adam  and  Eve  were  incapable  by  their  very 
constitution  of  sinning  against  their  own  higher 
nature,  considered  in  itself,  or  of  allowing  any  im- 
pulse to  demand  independent  play  in  defiance  of  the 
rest.  It  was  only  in  the  collective  rhythm  of  all  that 
each  could  find  full  scope  for  the  combined  self- 
abandonment  and  self-expression  which  is  its  life 
and  fulfilment.  When  our  first  parents  desired  to 
cat  of  the  forbidden  fruit  that  very  desire  is  the 
proof  that  what  they  sought  was  neither  evil  in  itself 
nor  intrinsically  evil  for  them.  But  to  desire  it  now 
and  thus  was  a  breach  of  that  subordination  of  their 

31 


THE     COMEDY 

life  in  its  fullness  to  the  total  order  to  which  they 
were  bidden  to  adjust  themselves  by  obedience  and 
not  by  sight.  It  was  because  Adam,  tempted  by  Eve, 
could  not  rest  content  under  the  provisional  veiling 
of  this  wider  purpose  from  human  sight  that  man 
fell.  Had  man  been  obedient  this  larger  relation  in 
which  he  stood  would  have  been  revealed  to  him  in 
due  course,  for  it  was  good  for  him  to  have  it, 
though  not  to  have  it  thus  and  now. 

The  punishment  was  in  exact  accord  with  the 
offence.  As  man  had  refused  to  seek  the  fulfilment 
of  his  desire  in  due  subordination  to  the  whole  of 
which  he  was  a  part,  so  now  his  several  passions, 
impulses,  and  desires  imitated  his  own  insubordina- 
tion and  no  longer  conspired  to  make  perfect  the 
whole  of  which  they  were  parts,  but  each  asserted 
itself  in  reckless  isolatioii,  and  destructively  invaded 
that  harmony  which  it  had  before  supported.  Thus 
reason  (the  perception  of  the  true  harmonies  of 
human  nature)  was  no  more  the  concordant  and 
spontaneous  self-weaving  of  the  varied  impulses  and 
faculties  of  man  into  the  pattern  that  gave  each  its 
full  interpretation  and  glory  ;  for  reason  had  now  to 
hold  a  precarious  and  tottering  seat  above  a  host  of 
seething  and  rebellious  passions  and  desires  that 
recognized  neither  its  authority  nor  each  other's 
rights.  Man  still  retained  so  much  of  the  divine 
light  as  to  see  dimly  that  there  must  be  some  con- 
clusive and  all-embracing  bliss  behind  and  beyond 
these  blind  and  mutually-destructive,  or  even  self- 
destructive,  pretenders  to  the  throne,  no  one  of  which 

32 


EDEN     AND     THE     FALL 

kept,  or  could  keep,  its  promises.  But  though  the 
love  of  beauty,  of  goodness,  and  of  truth  were  still 
innate  to  man,  yet  every  gleam  of  random  and  partial 
good  might  henceforth  claim  to  direct  his  steps,  and 
the  very  innocence  of  the  young  soul,  instead  of 
being  its  guarantee  of  safety,  might  betray  it  to  its 
corruption.^ 

Such,  then,  is  the  state  of  fallen  man,  and  such  was 
his  original  nature  and  destiny.  The  whole  history  of 
man  since  the  Fall  is  the  history,  on  the  one  hand,  of 
human  aberration,  and,  on  the  other,  of  the  means 
of  escape  and  recovery  vouchsafed  by  the  divine 
mercy.  Not  only  were  the  life  and  death  upon  earth 
of  the  Incarnate  Word  and  the  healing  power  of  the 
Church  and  her  administrations  means  and  channels 
of  this  grace,  but  so,  too,  were  the  civil  ordinances 
and  studies  that  regulate  the  mundane  affairs, 
relations,  thoughts,  and  imaginings  of  men  ;  for 
they,  too,  though  on  a  lower  plane,  are  a  part  of  the 
divine  provision  for  the  rescue  of  fallen  humanity. 
Secular  as  well  as  sacred  learning  has  its  sanction 
as  a  means  of  "  repairing  the  ravage  of  the  Fall." 

*  L*  anima  simplicetta,  che  sa  nulla, 
salvo  che,  mossa  da  lieto  fattore, 
volentier  torna  a  ci6  che  la  trastulla, 

Di  picciol  bene  in  pria  sente  sapore ; 
quivi  8*  inganna,  e  dietro  ad  essa  corre, 
se  guida  o  fren  non  torce  suo  amore. 

Purgatorio  xvi :   88  sqq. 


33 


THE     COMEDY 


III.     HELL 


And  now  at  length  we  have  reached  a  point  at  which 
we  can  trace  the  precise  bearing  of  these  fundamental 
beliefs  in  Dante's  mind  upon  his  treatment  of  hell 
and  purgatory  in  the  Comedy.  His  essential  or 
positive  theme  is  found  in  his  delineations  of  the 
Earthly  Paradise  and  Heaven,  for  it  is  here  that  the 
true  nature  of  human  life  and  the  true  destiny  of 
man  are  portrayed.  But  in  order  to  regain  the  lost 
position  from  which  the  realization  of  this  true  life 
and  destiny  is  possible  we  must  first  understand  the 
nature  of  our  aberrations,  and  in  the  second  place 
must  not  only  turn  away  from  them  but  must  so 
reverse  and  cancel  them  that  it  shall  be  as  though 
they  had  never  been.  Only  when  we  have  unlived 
our  evil  lives  shall  we  be  able  to  enter  upon  our  true 
life  with  no  uncancelled  record  of  perversity  to  mar 
its  purity. 

The  first  step  is  to  realize  what  we  have  fallen  to. 
The  second  step  is  to  cancel  the  fall  by  an  ascent. 
Hell  is  the  disordered  life  into  which  we  have 
fallen.  Purgatory  is  the  cancelling  penitence  by 
which  we  regain  the  estate  from  which  we  have 
lapsed. 

Dante's  vision  of  Hell,  therefore,  is  not  so  much 
a  warning  or  a  threat  as  to  the  consequence  of  sin  as 
a  revelation  of  its  inmost  nature  ;  and  to  reveal  the 
true  nature  of  sin  is  to  reveal  the  true  state  of  fallen 
and  sinful  man.   As  a  presentation  of  an  awful  fate 

34 


HELL 

that  will  catch  the  impenitent  sinner  hereafter 
Dante's  Inferno  must  rank  with  other  descriptions 
of  hell.  As  a  revelation  of  what  the  evil  choice  is  in 
itself,  wherever  and  whenever  made,  here  or  here- 
after, it  stands  alone. 

And  in  like  manner  Dante*s  Purgatorio  reveals  not 
the  painful  condition  on  compliance  with  which 
heaven  is  offered  to  the  repentant  sinner,  but  a 
blessed  opportunity  of  cancelling  from  within  his 
own  evil  past.  The  man  who  sees  where  his  choice 
has  so  identified  him  with  things  evil,  and  so  alienated 
him  from  things  good,  that  his  own  record  would 
make  a  discord  with  heaven  in  his  soul,  is  now 
allowed  to  build  up  for  himself  a  new  record 
of  passionate  self-identification  with  good  which 
shall  utterly  annul  the  record  of  his  former  self- 
surrender  to  evil  and  shall  construct  a  record 
through  which  "  the  stream  of  memory  can  flow 
unstained."^ 

In  other  words,  Dante's  Inferno  is  a  revelation  of 
the  falseness  of  the  values  by  which  we  live  when  we 
sin.  And  his  Purgatorio  tells  how  a  new  life,  lived  in 
tune  with  a  new  sense  of  values,  may  make  our  whole 
consciousness,  not  only  our  aspirations  and  desires, 
harmonious  with  the  experiences  of  Eden  and  of 
Heaven. 

But  here  (to  borrow  a  technical  term  from  Dante's 

^  Se  tosto  grazia  risolva  le  schiume 
di  vostra  conscicnza,  si  chc  chiaro 
per  essa  scenda  della  mente  il  fiumc. 

Purgatorio  xiii :  88  /ff. 


THE     COMEDY 

vocabulary)  we  must  be  careful  to  "  distinguish.'* 
On  its  own  denizens  hell  has  no  remedial  effect 
whatever,  for  it  brings  no  revelation  to  them.  It  is 
the  place  in  which  "  there  is  no  returning  to  a  right 
state  of  will/'  ^  and  to  say  that  there  is  no  possibility 
of  repentance  in  Hell  is  to  say  that  there  can  be  no 
changed  sense  of  values,  and  so  no  revelation  of  the 
true  meaning  of  sin  to  those  who  are  there.  So  far 
Dante  was  in  close  accord  with  the  received  teaching 
of  his  time,  and,  indeed,  with  the  professed  creed  of 
the  vast  majority  of  Christians  in  almost  every  age. 
Hell,  to  Dante  as  to  others,  was  eternal — not,  indeed, 
in  the  primary  sense  of  being  altogether  out  of  rela- 
tion to  time,  without  beginning  or  end,  and  without 
any  conscious  successions,  but  in  the  secondary 
sense  of  "  ever-enduring "  and  "  not  subject  to 
essential  change."  Hell  therefore  is  the  place  of 
impenitent  sin,  in  which  the  sinners,  though 
raging  against  their  accomplices,  accusing  their 
ill-luck,  or  cursing  God,  their  parents,  and  their 
kin — 

The  human  race,  the  seed  from  which  they  grew, 
The  hour  and  place  they  were  begotten  in  ^ — 

(Musgrave) 

^  U'  non  si  riede 
giammai  a  buon  voler. 

Paradiso  xx  :   1 06  sq. 

2  Bestemmiavano  Iddio  e  lor  parenti, 

1'  umana  specie,  il  luogo,  il  tempo  e  il  seme 
di  lor  semenza  e  di  lor  nascimenti. 

Inferno  iii :   103  sqq. 

36 


HELL 

yet  never  essentially  change  their  ideals.  However 
well  they  see  the  folly  of  what  they  did^  they  no  more 
feel  the  vileness  or  vanity  of  what  they  aimed  at  than 
they  did  on  earth.  But  the  very  consistency  and  force 
with  which  Dante  holds  this  belief  transforms  his 
vision  of  Hell  into  a  revelation  of  the  nature  of  the 
evil  choice  itself  and  of  the  state  of  mind  that  it 
expresses.  And  it  is  this  that  distinguishes,  from  the 
moral  and  spiritual  point  of  view,  Dante's  descrip- 
tions from  those,  for  instance,  of  Aquinas  or  of 
Bunyan.  While  they  in  their  delineations  of  Hell 
exhaust  their  genius  in  the  attempt  to  impress  upon 
us  the  frightful  consequences  we  shall  incur  by  sin, 
Dante  reveals  to  us  the  inherent  evilness  of  the  evil 
choice  itself,  and  turns  not  only  our  deliberate  will, 
but  our  affections  and  our  very  passions  clean  away 
from  it. 

The  manner  in  which  Dante  accomplishes  his 
purpose  can  be  brought  under  no  formula.  It  is  true, 
in  general,  to  say  that  in  reading  the  Inferno  we  realize 
how  the  man  who  makes  an  evil  choice  has  simply 
to  have  rope  enough,  and  to  get,  without  qualifica- 
tion or  relief,  exactly  what  he  seeks,  in  order  therein 
and  thereby  to  be  utterly  damned.  Thus  we  see  the 
misers  rolling  huge  stones  with  ceaseless  strain  and 
toil,  but  accomplishing  nothing,  and  getting  no- 
where, for  ever  and  ever.  But  this  is  just  what  the 
miser  is  doing  now.  He  is  courting  toil  and  weariness 
and  depriving  himself  of  all  their  fruits.  To  do  this 
always  and  only  is  his  constant  endeavour,  and  to 
succeed  in  doing  it  is  Hell.   Or  we  may  listen  to  the 

37 


THE     COMEDY 

confession  of  the  sullen  souls  sunken  in  the  mire  of 

the  river  Styx  : 

Sullen  we  were 
Once  in  the  sweet  air  where  the  Sun  makes  glee, 
And  sluggish  vapours  then  within  us  bare  ; 
Now  in  these  bitter  dregs  sullen  are  we  !  ^ 

(MUSGRAVE.) 

This  is  what  sulking  is.  If  we  choose  by  a  deliberate 
exercise  of  will  to  shut  out  the  sunshine  and  air  of 
converse  with  those  around  us,  and  to  nurse  a  venge- 
ful sense  of  grievance  in  the  sodden  blackness  of  our 
minds,  and  if  we  are  strong  enough  to  persist  and 
to  succeed,  then  we  have  achieved — Hell. 

The  attempt  has  sometimes  been  made  to  work 
out  this  idea,  and  this  alone,  through  every  circle 
and  into  every  detail.  But  this  is  to  reduce  the  free 
play  of  Dante's  splendid  and  appalling  imagination 
to  the  artificiality  of  an  ingenious  but  frigid  allegory ; 
and,  as  a  fact,  his  method  varies.  Sometimes  the 
punishment  of  the  sin  is  represented  under  the 
more  obvious  and  familiar  type  of  the  sinner  re- 
ceiving the  same  measure  which  he  had  himself 
meted.  Thus,  the  sowers  of  schism,  who  have  dis- 
severed those  who  belong  to  each  other  and  who 
must  ever  yearn  for  reunion,  are  themselves  cleft 
and  mangled — to  reunite  and  be  cleft  again — by 
the  scimitar  of  a  fiend.    In  other  cases  the  form 

1  Tristi  fummo 

neir  aer  dolce  che  dal  sol  s'  allegra, 
portando  dentro  accidioso  fummo  : 
Or  ci  attristiam  nella  belletta  negra. 

Inferno  vii :   \2\  sqq. 

38 


HELL 

of  punishment  is,  in  the  first  instance  at  least,  sug- 
gested, for  example,  by  a  current  etymology  that 
connected  the  word  "  hypocrite  **  with  the  Greek 
word  for  **  gold,"  or  by  the  scriptural  association  of 
the  punishment  of  unnatural  vice  with  the  fiery  rain 
that  fell  upon  the  Cities  of  the  Plain.  But  whenceso- 
ever  Dante  derives  his  materials  and  whatever  the 
particular  relation  between  sin  and  punishment  into 
which  he  works  them,  the  whole  atmospheric  im- 
pression is  uniform  and  is  irresistible.  Every  reader 
who  is  not  paralyzed  by  mere  horrors,  or  carried 
away  by  isolated  splendours  of  poetry,  feels,  vaguely 
perhaps  at  first,  but  with  inevitable  cumulative  effect 
as  he  reads  on  and  as  he  reads  again,  that  a  great  seer 
is  unfolding  to  him  the  Vision  of  Sin,  and  this  as  the 
first  step  in  his  task  of  striving  "  to  rescue  those  who 
are  yet  living  from  the  state  of  misery  and  lead  them 
to  the  state  of  bliss.** 

In  his  dogmatic  conception  of  hell,  then,  as  a 
place  of  eternal  and  hopeless  misery  Dante  stands 
where  his  contemporaries  stood,  but  under  this 
aspect  he  does  not  make  the  least  attempt  to  explain 
it,  or  bring  it  into  relation  with  our  human  sense  of 
justice.  He  simply  accepts  it  as  a  part  of  the  divine 
scheme.  It  wakes  pity  and  horror  in  the  poet's  own 
heart.  The  enlightened  eyes  of  Beatrice  seeing  it  as 
God  sees  it  can  look  upon  it  unmoved.^  But  it  is  in 
Epistola  ad  Kanem  Grandem  (15):  268  sff.  [39]. 

^  lo  son  fatto  da  Dio,  sua  merc^,  tale, 
che  la  vostra  miseria  non  mi  tange. 

Inferno  ii :  91  /f. 

39 


THE     COMEDY 

the  Strength  of  faith,  not  of  sight,  that  Dante  calls  it 
the  work  of  **  the  Divine  Power,  the  Supreme 
Wisdom,  and  the  Primal  Love."  He  cannot  look 
upon  it  without  being  caught  by  swirls  of  uncon- 
trollable anguish  or  having  to  wrestle  with  a  passion- 
ate inward  protest. 

It  is  by  thus  abstaining  from  all  attempts  to  ex- 
plain Hell,  or  to  **  justify  the  ways  of  God  "  in 
creating  it,  that  Dante  gives  it  the  impersonality 
which  alone  makes  it  tolerable.  It  fixes  the  reader*s 
mind  upon  Hell  not  as  a  material  fact  (which 
however  it  scared  could  hardly  convert  or  enlighten 
him),  but  as  a  symbol  of  impenitent  sin — a  symbol 
which  can  never  lose  its  significance  or  its  redeeming 
power  so  long  as  men  are  capable  of  erring  and  of 
recognizing  that  they  have  erred. 

It  remains,  in  this  connection,  to  note  that  it  was 
in  relation  to  the  dogma  of  an  eternal  Hell  that 
Dante's  faith  found  its  hardest  and  perhaps  its  only 
trial.  That  a  Virgil  or  an  Aristotle,  for  no  defect  in 
their  own  lives  or  conduct,  and  for  no  neglected 
opportunity  that  had  ever  been  presented  to  them, 
should  be  eternally  barred  from  conclusive  bliss,  and 
should  be  condemned  for  ever  to  live  in  longing  that 
knew  no  hope,  appeared  so  cruelly  unjust  that  we 
feel  the  strain  upon  his  faith  almost  reaching  the 
breaking-point.  The  thought  of  Virgil's  exile  gives 
to  Dante's  portraiture  of  him  a  pathos  that  has  no 
parallel  in  literature  ;  and  the  **  thirst  of  many 
years"  with  which  it  parched  his  soul,  though  it 
prompted  one  of  the  sublimest  songs  of  faith  ever 

40 


HELL 

Uttered  by  man,  was  carried  back  from  heaven  to 
earth  unslaked,  however  soothed. 

The  hell  of  Dante's  creed,  then,  is  an  unexplained 
and  unintelligible  place  of  torture  ;  but  the  Hell  of 
his  vision  is  the  revelation  of  the  nature  of  impenitent 
sin.  And  it  follows,  on  either  count,  that  the  vision 
of  Hell  vouchsafed  to  the  pilgrims  can  never  be 
shared  by  the  Denizens  of  hell  itself;  for  sin,  so 
long  as  it  is  impenitent,  cannot  see  itself  as  it  is. 
The  message  that  the  souls  in  hell  have  for  Dante, 
and  through  him  for  us,  they  can  never  receive  them- 
selves. Trajan,  it  is  true,  had  been  in  hell,  and  at 
the  prayer  of  Gregory  had  been  released  from 
bondage,  so  that  Dante  saw  his  soul  in  the  heaven 
of  the  just.  But  even  he  had  not  repented,  or  rather 
had  not  come  to  the  right  view  of  truth,  in  hell,  but 
had  been  restored  miraculously  to  the  earthly  life 
in  order  that  he  might  be  capable  of  the  enlighten- 
ment which  it  was  unthinkable  that  he  should  receive 
in  hell. 

It  is  possible  to  initiate  on  earth  the  process  which, 
continued  in  Purgatory,  shall  lead  to  the  Terrestrial 
Paradise  and  ultimately  to  Heaven.  But  it  is  not 
possible  for  that  process  to  be  initiated  in  hell. 
Hence  there  is  an  absolute  and  final  discontinuity 
between  hell  and  purgatory,  objectively  and  for 
their  denizens.  The  departing  soul  takes  its  journey 
cither  to  the  bank  of  Acheron  to  find  its  eternal 
place  in  hell,  or  else  to  the  mouth  of  Tiber  to  gain 
the  shore  of  the  purifying  mount,  the  Garden  of 

Paradiio  xix,  xx. 

4> 


THE     COMEDY 

Eden,  and  then  Heaven,  in  its  continuous  progress 
towards  its  eternal  place  of  fruition  in  God.  But  these 
are  alternatives,  and  there  is  no  passing  through  Hell 
to  Purgatory. 

Nevertheless,  so  completely  does  Dante*s  vision 
dominate  his  dogma  in  the  resultant  impression  left 
on  the  reader's  mind  that  nothing  is  more  common 
than  to  find  the  subjective  continuity  of  the  pilgrim's 
experience  translated  into  terms  of  an  objective  con- 
tinuity of  function  in  the  regions  he  traverses. 
Hence,  such  assertions  as  that,  "  according  to  Dante, 
Hell  is  the  first  step  towards  Heaven.'*  How  en- 
tirely this  contradicts  Dante's  conception  we  have 
clearly  seen,  for  Hell  is  the  evil  choice  stereotyped 
and  irrevocable.  It  is  a  false  scheme  of  values 
arrested,  ingrained,  and  become  indelible.  But 
whereas  the  damned  for  ever  see  sin  as  it  is  not,  they 
reveal  it  as  it  is,  and  therefore  the  vision  of  Hell  is 
indeed  what  Hell  itself  is  not — the  first  step  to 
Heaven.  To  have  **  seen  "  what  the  fallen  state  is 
fills  us  with  heimweh  for  the  Paradise  we  have  lost 
and  sets  our  will  to  regain  it. 

IV.     PURGATORY     AND     THE     RECOVERED 

EDEN 

Dante  uniformly  represents  his  vision  as  the  record 
of  an  actual  experience  which  had  been  granted  to 
him  by  a  miraculous  intervention  wholly  outside  the 
ordinary  course  of  nature.  He  was  called  to  this 
experience  by  the  divine  mercy  as  the  sole  means  of 

42 


PURGATORY     AND     EDEN 

breaking  down  the  obduracy  of  his  own  sinful  heart 
which  had  resisted  even  the  exceptional  means  of 
grace  already  vouchsafed  to  him.  But  the  facts  which 
he  represents  as  brought  home  to  him  with  over- 
whelming force  and  directness  by  miraculous  means, 
are  accessible  enough  to  all  of  us  on  earth  if  we 
would  but  see  them.  Dante  saw  the  evil  choice  as  it 
really  is  because  he  saw  it  stripped  of  all  disguise, 
freed  from  all  admixture,  and  robbed  of  the  glamour 
with  which  false  imaginations  and  associations  in- 
vest it.  But  we,  too,  may  see  it  as  it  is  if  we  will  but 
open  our  eyes.  Nor  does  Dante  conceive  that  God 
has  left  us,  even  in  our  fallen  state,  altogether  with- 
out succour.  Reason,  it  is  true,  was  weakened  and 
confused  by  the  Fall,  and  the  passions  now  no  longer 
spontaneously  acknowledge  her  sway.  But  it  is  still 
her  function  to  emancipate  all  our  natural  impulses 
and  appetites,  both  of  sense  and  soul,  from  the  im- 
potence and  thwartings  of  isolated  self-assertion  and 
to  bring  them  back  to  the  freedom  and  harmony  of 
mutual  support  and  order.  Under  her  control  the 
earthly  life,  even  of  fallen  man,  may  approximate 
ever  more  closely  to  the  life  of  Eden.  And  so  even 
as  the  divine  grace  condescended  to  prepare  through 
long  ages  the  redemptive  plan  which,  in  its  last 
great  act  on  the  Mount  of  Calvary,  should  cancel 
3ie  **  long  prohibition  **  that  had  barred  man  out  of 
his  forfeited  heaven,  so,  too,  by  a  contemporaneous 
evolution  on  the  secular  side  this  same  grace  had 
elaborated  a  system  for  the  regulation  of  the  affairs 

Purgatorio  xxx:    133-138. 

43 


THE    COMEDY 

of  this  world  which  should  enable  man  in  large 
measure  to  "  repair  the  ravage  of  the  Fall  "  on  its 
temporal  and  earthly  side. 

Nothing  is  more  essential  for  the  right  under- 
standing of  Dante  than  a  clear  conception  of  this  two- 
fold work  of  restoration  as  he  conceives  it.  In  Eden 
Reason  spontaneously  secured  man  in  the  enjoyment 
of  terrestrial  felicity,  and  Revelation  would  have  led 
him,  in  due  course,  first  to  a  knowledge  of  the  con- 
ditions of  celestial  bliss  and  then  to  its  fruition. 
Nor  did  either  Reason  or  Revelation  abdicate  its 
function  at  the  Fall.  It  is  still  Reason's  business  to 
lead  man  to  a  life  as  of  Eden  ;  and  that  is  why  Virgil 
is  Dante's  guide  not  only  in  Hell,  but  right  up  into 
the  very  Garden  of  Eden  itself  at  the  summit  of  the 
Mount  of  Purgatory.  And  it  is  still  the  function  of 
Revelation  to  declare  to  man  the  nature  of  heavenly 
bliss  and  to  direct  him  to  its  attainment.  Reason  has 
spoken  through  the  great  philosophers  and  poets, 
and  has  organized  her  counsels  for  the  regulation  of 
social  life  in  that  august  instrument  of  administrative 
justice  the  Roman  Law,  called  by  Dante  scritta 
ragione — "  Reason  codified.''  And  in  like  manner 
Revelation  has  been  embodied  in  the  Scriptures  of 
the  Old  and  New  Testaments. 

Nor  did  the  divinely  granted  succour  to  fallen 
man  arrest  itself  here  :  for  Scripture  and  Roman 
Law  were  each  of  them  committed  to  the  authorized 
guardianship  and  interpretative  administration  of  a 
great  institution  which  had  been  elaborated  -pari 
-passu  with  them ;  the  institutions,  namely,  of  the 

44 


PURGATORY     AND     EDEN 

Empire  and  the  Church,  the  **  spouse  and  secretary 
of  God  **  who  "  cannot  lie." 

It  is  with  the  former  of  these  two  institutions  that 
we  are  immediately  concerned.  Had  the  Empire 
performed  its  duties,  and  had  Roman  Law  been 
duly  enforced,  there  would  have  been  a  standing 
vindication  of  justice  upon  earth  and  a  perpetual 
setting  forth  of  the  true  scheme  of  moral  values. 
Greed,  the  greatest  foe  of  justice,  would  have  been 
held  in  check  ;  with  justice  assured  peace  would 
have  been  firmly  established  ;  in  relations  of  mutual 
helpfulness  the  nations  of  the  earth  would  have 
supplemented  and  aided  each  the  other's  progress, 
and  the  goal  of  human  civilization  would  have  been 
reached  in  a  life  of  earthly  felicity  reflecting,  at  least, 
though  not  fully  realizing,  the  original  design  of  the 
Creator  for  the  earthly  stage  of  man's  existence.  But 
the  Empire,  internally  false  to  its  mission  and  ex- 
ternally thwarted  by  the  secular  usurpations  of  the 
Church,  had  failed  to  give  the  needed  guidance  and 
support  to  frail  and  hesitating  human  virtue,  and  man 
had  gone  farther  and  farther  astray  for  lack  of  true 
leaders.  Nevertheless,  in  the  heart  of  man  the  light 
of  Reason  still  shone,  though  with  dimmed  lustre, 
and  was  still  shed  abroad  by  the  writings  of  poets 
and  philosophers,  while  the  protest  of  the  Roman 
Law  against  every  form  of  injustice  still  stood. 

Convivio  II.  vi :  33  sq.  [v  :  5],  iv  :  32  /f.  [iii :  10].  Cf.  IV.  xv  : 

Monarchic  I.  iii  /ff .,  III.  xvi,  and  passim.  Purgatorio  xvi :  97  /f^., 
zzzii :  94  /f  f  .,and  many  other  passages  in  the  Comedy  and  elsewhere. 

45 


THE     COMEDY 

Men  therefore  were  not  without  means  of  ethical 
grace,  and  only  the  most  hardened  could  fail  to  see, 
at  least  in  their  better  moments,  the  true  nature  of 
good  and  evil  and  to  turn  from  the  evil  that  had 
stained  their  own  lives.  Such  repentance  when  deep 
and  sincere  would  not  be  a  mere  intellectual  per- 
ception, however  vivid,  of  the  right  values  and  of  the 
reasonableness  of  a  life  regulated  by  them.  It  would 
be  a  definite  act  of  the  will  and  of  the  affections, 
going  out  in  passionate  love  to  the  virtues  erst 
neglected,  and  actively  repelling  and  abominating 
the  evil  once  embraced.  To  the  truly  penitent 
an  evil  choice  is  not  something  that,  though  still 
attractive,  must  be  resisted.  For  true  repentance  is  a 
turning  away  of  the  whole  heart  and  the  whole  will 
and  inclination  from  evil  ways.  To  the  truly  penitent 
such  ways  have  become  hateful. 

Yet  here  on  earth  this  true  repentance  may  be 
short-lived.  It  is,  indeed,  easy  to  imagine  one  who 
has  practised,  let  us  say,  wanton  cruelty  to  man  or 
beast  seeing  at  a  flash  the  true  nature  of  his  action 
and  by  a  definitive  revulsion  of  feeling  becoming  in- 
capable of  ever  again  committing  such  acts  or  taking 
pleasure  in  them.  Such  a  one  would  be  seized  by  an 
almost  intolerable  sense  of  compunction  and  by  a 
longing  to  do  and  to  bear  in  the  cause  of  mercy  and 
tenderness,  and  to  cancel  the  self-identification  with 
a  hateful  thing  which  stained  the  record  of  his  life. 
Such  a  repentance,  in  the  case  supposed,  would  be 
conclusive  and  final.  But  it  is  only  too  familiar  to 
human  experience  that  a  repentance  equally  pas- 

46 


PURGATORY     AND     EDEN 

sionate  and  sincere  and  perhaps  equally  secure  of  its 
own  permanence  nevertheless  may  break  down 
under  stress  of  temptation.  The  thing  that  had  be- 
come hateful  has  resumed  its  power  of  attraction, 
and  the  false  values  again  blur  the  true.  Thus,  on 
earth  the  glimpses  of  the  Hell  of  evil  choice  and  will, 
conclusive  as  they  seem  to  us  at  the  time,  may  yet 
pass  away.  But  as  long  as  true  penitence  lasts  it  is  no 
determination  to  abandon  a  course  that  still  attracts 
(for  this  at  best  is  only  a  desire  to  repent,  and  not 
repentance),  but  an  actual  "conversion,**  a  "turning 
round  **  of  our  affections  themselves. 

On  earth,  then,  impulses  to  good  and  evil  may 
chase  each  other  across  our  hearts,  and  even  whilst 
we  are  definitely  overcoming  our  evil  ways  we  may 
constantly  have  to  fortify  our  will  against  unregener- 
ate  impulses  that  refuse  to  be  silenced  even  when 
controlled.  But  according  to  Dante's  view  this  is 
not  so  either  in  Hell  or  in  Purgatory.  For  in  the  one 
.realm  penitence  is  impossible  and  in  the  other  it  has 
been,  so  to  say,  "  lock-stitched  "  and  is  irreversible. 

Dante  believed  that  genuine  and  passionate  con- 
version or  repentance  is  in  any  case  necessary  to 
salvation.  If  a  man  is  not  so  repentant  at  the  moment 
of  death  his  way  lies  to  Acheron,  and  repentance  is 
for  ever  impossible.  But  if,  at  that  moment  of  death, 
not  only  his  aspirations  and  resolves  but  his  affec- 
tions and  impulses  are  directed  aright,  then  there 
is  no  going  back  for  him,  and  his  dispositions, 
secure  from  all  change  or  slackening,  become  ir- 
revocable as  he  passes  into  the  world  of  spirits. 

47 


THE     COMEDY 

When  Dante  had  seen  Hell  he  felt  that  whatever 
weakness  or  fluctuation  there  might  still  be  in  his 
life  the  vision  itself  could  never  wax  dim.  Hence- 
forth he  would  always  know  sin  for  what  it  was  ; 
and  when  the  decisive  moment  came  the  rush  of  his 
affections  would  inevitably  sweep  him  towards  that 
which  is  good ;  just  as  when  we  are  most  chilled  or 
even  embittered  in  our  feelings  towards  those  we 
love,  we  know  in  our  heart  that  if,  at  that  instant,  our 
whole  relation  to  them  were  collectively  and  con- 
clusively at  stake  our  trivial  sense  of  alienation  would 
be  utterly  consumed  in  the  flame  of  all-embracing 
love  ;  and  this  very  knowledge  makes  us  ashamed  of 
the  momentary  disproportions  which  our  distorted 
vision  has  imposed  upon  the  things  that  matter  and 
the  things  that  do  not.  It  was  to  secure  men  to  this 
condition  of  underlying  certainty  of  affection,  even 
amid  the  rise  and  fall  of  random  impulses  not  yet 
under  full  control,  that  Dante  delivered  his  message 
to  "  remove  those  living  in  this  life  from  the  state 
of  misery  and  bring  them  to  the  state  of  bliss." 
Thus,  if  the  Inferno  is  a  study  of  unrepentant  sin, 
the  Purgatorio  is  a  study  of  the  state  of  true  penitence 
wherever  and  whenever  it  may  exist. 

It  was  a  part  of  the  general  belief  and  tradition  of 
Dante's  day  that  though  the  act  of  repentance  fol- 
lowed by  confession  and  absolution  obliterates  the 
guilt  of  sin,  yet  unperformed  penances  and  the  per- 
petual accretion,  at  the  very  least,  of  venial  sin  will 
in  all  cases,  save  that  of  saints  and  martyrs,  leave  a 
surplus  to  be  expiated  in  dire  pain  of  the  senses  after 

48 


PURGATORY     AND     EDEN 

death.  Here  as  elsewhere  we  read  Dante*s  mind  in 
his  distribution  of  stresses  more  than  in  the  articles 
of  his  creed.  He  accepted  indeed  the  penal  and 
expiatory  function  of  Purgatory,  but  his  stress  is 
laid  on  a  conception  of  it  that  the  official  repre- 
sentatives of  the  Church  overlooked  if  they  did  not 
deny.  For  to  him  not  even  the  most  efficacious 
sacrament,  not  the  atoning  death  on  the  cross,  not 
even  the  sense  of  the  divine  forgiveness  can  super- 
sede the  need  of  the  self-expression  of  penitence 
following  on  the  act  of  repentance  :  and  it  is  to 
this  essential  quality  of  penitence  that  he  directs 
our  minds.  For  he  regards  the  pains  of  the  souls  in 
Purgatory  not  as  a  price  they  have  to  pay  for  entry 
into  Heaven,  but  as  a  medium  through  which  they 
can  vitally  utter  their  repudiation  of  their  own  past 
and  assert  their  loyalty  to  the  things  they  had  once 
denied  and  betrayed.  Thus,  the  pains  of  Purgatory 
are  not  endured,  but  are  welcomed  and  embraced  as 
a  solace  and  support  which  relieves  the  else  in- 
tolerable sense  of  discord  in  the  soul  between  the 
things  it  loves  and  the  things  it  has  actively  stood  for. 
So  whether  the  avaricious,  for  example,  who  had 
turned  away  from  the  stars  of  heaven  and  fixed  their 
gaze  upon  the  dust  of  earth,  in  sordid  preference  for 
low  and  cramping  aims,  still  lie  prone  and  bound, 
testifying  to  their  unworthincss  to  look  upon  the 
heaven  they  love  or  away  from  the  earth  that  bears 
witness  against  them  ;  or  whether  the  gluttons — so 
famished  that  their  sunken  eye-sockets  are  **  like 
Purga/mo  xivi :  13-15,  xxiii :  70-75,  85  Sf.,  ixi :  64-66. 
49  D 


THE     COMEDY 

rings  from  which  the  jewel  has  been  thrust  out  " — 
who  pass  by  the  deHcious  fruit-trees  feehng  and 
mastering  the  tug,  in  its  full  organic  strength,  of  that 
appetite  which  in  its  mere  languor  of  self-cultivation 
had  once  enslaved  them  ;  in  every  case  the  sufferings 
are  no  mere  passive  endurance.  In  every  case  they 
are  an  active  self-expression,  a  reversing  and  un- 
living of  the  past  life,  a  countering  of  its  evil  record; 
a  thing  positive,  not  negative,  a  self-identification 
with  the  values  of  Eden ;  an  act,  not  a  mere  acquies- 
cence, of  the  will. 

The  souls  of  the  repentant  do  indeed  desire  so  to 
complete  their  repudiation  of  the  past  that  it  shall 
once  for  all  be  cast  off  and  done  with,  so  that  they 
shall  no  longer  feel  that  it  belongs  to  them  or  they  in 
any  sense  to  it.  Then  they  will  be  able  to  enter  the 
life  of  Innocence  in  the  Garden  of  Eden  without 
feeling  that  they  themselves  make  a  discord  with  it 
and  are  a  blot  upon  its  beauty  and  its  sweetness. 
When  that  time  comes  the  spontaneous  impulse  to 
rise  into  the  unreproved  fruition  of  their  inheritance 
of  delight  will  "  surprise  *'  them,  and  at  the  same 
moment  the  whole  mountain  will  shake  with  a  cry 
of  sympathetic  triumph  rising  from  the  souls  that 
still  have  to  dree  their  weird.  But,  until  that  moment 
comes  for  it,  each  soul  flings  itself  upon  its  pain,  not 
so  much  because  it  is  incidentally  painful  as  because 
it  is  essentially  expressive  of  its  present  passion. 

To  sum  up,  then,  the  Inferno  shows  us  what  the 

Purgatorio  xviii  :  115-117,  xx :  127-138,  with  xxi :  58-66. 
Cf.  xix  :  1 39-141. 

50 


PURGATORY     AND     EDEN 

loss  of  Eden  means.  To  have  seen  Hell  is  to  hate 
evil  and  to  turn  with  strong  rebound  to  the  blurred 
and  desecrated  ideals  of  that  better  self  which  still 
preserves  the  impress  of  the  life  of  Innocence.  To 
go  through  Purgatory  is  to  undo  the  past,  and,  at 
last,  to  resolve  the  discord  between  what  we  love 
and  what  we  have  been  ;  so  the  Purgatorio  teaches 
us  that  Eden  may  be  and  must  be  regained,  and 
shows  us  the  way.  But  there  is  yet  another  step. 
On  the  terraces  of  purgation  on  the  Mount  the 
souls  contemplate  evil  as  the  foul  thing  they  have 
embraced  and  good  as  the  loveliness  they  have  cast 
away.  Must  not  the  very  passion  of  concentrated 
repudiation  stamp  the  memory,  at  any  rate,  of  evil, 
all  the  more  indelibly  upon  the  consciousness  } 
Perhaps.  But  it  is  not  so  in  Eden  itself.  Actually  to 
live  the  life  of  Innocence,  with  the  sense  of  utterly 
belonging  to  it,  makes  past  evil  so  unreal  and  un- 
believable that  it  is  as  though  it  had  not  been.  It  has 
no  hold  upon  mind  or  memory.  And  so  Dante  tells 
us  of  the  stream  of  Lethe  that  springs,  not  on  the 
purgatorial  sides  of  the  Mount,  but  in  the  Garden 
of  Eden  itself.  When  he  has  drunk  of  that  stream 
and  stands  unreproved  by  Beatrice's  side  the  whole 
history  of  his  aberrations  and  his  recovery  drops 
clean  out  of  his  mind.  His  present  innocence  links 
itself  directly  to  the  innocence  of  those  early  days 
when  Beatrice  still  led  his  willing  feet  **  upon  the 
true  path,"  and  he  is  conscious  of  no  alien  wander- 
ings ever  having  intervened.  To  have  seen  Hell,  to 
have  gone  through  Purgatory,  to  have  lived  the  life 

51 


THE     COMEDY 

of  Innocence  and  drunk  the  waters  of  Lethe,  is  to 
stand  where  our  first  parents  stood — or  would  have 
stood  had  they  persevered  under  their  first  trial — 
with  young-eyed  wonder  and  delight,  in  a  world 
whose  beauty  cannot  ensnare  nor  its  loves  betray. 

EPILOGUE 

A  right  understanding  of  the  relation  of  Purgatory 
to  the  Earthly  Paradise  and  of  the  Earthly  Paradise 
to  Heaven  as  Dante  conceived  them  will  bring  out 
the  profound  significance  of  a  special  feature  in  his 
representation  of  the  site  of  purgatory  that  everyone 
has  noticed  but  not  everyone  has  understood.  He 
departs  from  the  uniform  assumption  of  his  con- 
temporaries that  purgatory  lay  in  the  subterranean 
purlieus  of  hell ;  and  he  locates  it  on  the  sides  of  a 
great  mountain  at  the  antipodes  of  Jerusalem.  The 
full  meaning  of  this  will  be  grasped  when  we  note 
that,  according  to  Dante,  this  mountain  originally 
rose,  not  as  a  place  of  purgation,  but  as  what  we  may 
call  the  pedestal  of  the  Garden  of  Eden.  It  was  only 
when  man  had  fallen  from  his  high  estate  and  must 
toilsomely  regain  what  had  originally  been  his  birth- 
right that  he  had  to  **  climb  "  that  mount  to  the 
summit  of  which  he  was  by  rights  native.  To  Dante 
it  was  an  inevitable  dictate  of  symbolical  logic  that 
the  process  of  vital  recovery  of  the  state  of  Innocence 
should  be  worked  out  in  process  of  the  physical 
ascent  to  the  actual  Eden. 

And  note,  above  all,  that  to  Dante  Eden  is  still 
52 


EPILOGUE 

the  appointed  vestibule  of  Heaven.  He  had  no  con- 
ception of  the  ideal  earthly  life  being  a  non-essential 
part  of  the  experience  of  man  that  had  been  per- 
manently lost  by  the  Fall.  The  earthly  life  existed 
of  its  own  right,  and  not  only  as  a  prelude  to  the 
heavenly  life.  He  would  have  endorsed  with  all  his 
heart  the  opinion  of  Aquinas  previously  expounded 
(p.  27),  that  the  human  experience  of  a  mind  de- 
veloping under  the  stimulus  of  the  senses  and  up- 
building itself  on  the  materials  supplied  by  them — 
in  perfect  balance  and  spontaneous  symmetry, 
abandoning  itself  with  entire  confidence  to  the 
guidance  of  its  own  impulses  and  never  betrayed  by 
them — was  needed  not  only  for  the  replacing  of  the 
fallen  angels,  and  not  only  for  the  training  of  man 
for  Heaven,  but  also  on  its  own  account  as  a  phase 
of  the  creative  joy  of  God  and  the  perfection  of  the 
universe.  The  belief  that  some  approach  to  this 
ideal  life  on  earth  was  still  possible  inspired  Dante 
with  his  profound  reverence  for  all  the  instruments 
of  good  government  and  for  every  artistic  expression 
of  beauty  ;  and  it  fed  that  native  optimism  as  to  the 
future  possibilities  of  the  human  race  which  is  con- 
stantly cropping  up  through  the  surface  of  his  official 
pessimism  and  triumphing  over  the  darkness  of  his 
personal  experience.  Yet  the  life  we  now  live  could 
at  best  render  but  an  imperfect  and  distorted  image 
of  the  life  of  Eden,  as  it  stood  at  the  beginning  in  the 
creative  plan.  And  to  Dante  therefore  it  was  a 
spiritual  necessity  to  think  of  the  ideal  state  of  Eden 
itself  being  actually  experienced  on  this  eanh^  if  not 

53 


THE     COMEDY 

in  this  life ;  that  there  might  be  no  hiatus  or  defect 
in  the  full  realization  of  the  earthly  and  the  heavenly 
joy  of  the  elect. 

One  more  subject  must  be  touched  upon.  The 
purpose  of  this  essay  was  to  set  forth  the  essential 
thought  of  Heaven  to  which  the  thought  of  Hell 
and  of  Purgatory  is  related  in  Dante's  mind.  To 
enter  upon  his  actual  treatment  of  the  transcen- 
dent theme  of  Heaven  is  beyond  its  scope.  But 
there  is  one  point  at  which  the  Paradiso  is  so  linked 
to  the  representation  of  the  Terrestrial  Paradise  that 
a  few  supplementary  words  must  be  added  to  what 
can  be  read  in  the  Purgatorio,  We  have  seen  that 
Dante,  when  he  has  drunk  of  Lethe,  forgets  all  that 
intervened  since  he  strayed  from  the  ideals  associated 
with  Beatrice,  so  that  not  only  all  the  beautiful  com- 
panionship and  care  of  Virgil,  but  the  pleadings 
with  him,  "  in  dream  and  otherwise,"  of  Beatrice 
herself,  and  her  journey  to  hell  to  secure  VirgiFs 
guidance  for  him,  have  passed  out  of  his  mind  be- 
cause the  meaning  and  the  occasion  of  them  have 
become  unrealizable  to  him  inasmuch  as  they 
rested  on  errors  of  which  there  is  now  no  record  or 
trace  in  his  mind. 

But  surely  these  things  in  themselves  were  good, 
though  the  occasion  that  called  them  forth  was  evil, 
and,  as  good,  they  will  enter  into  the  consciousness 
of  his  soul  in  heaven  though  they  have  vanished 
from  it  on  earth.  Yes,  for  there  is  another  stream  be- 
sides Lethe  in  the  Earthly  Paradise.  It  is  the  stream 

Purgatorio  xxx  :   1 3  3- 1 4 1 . 

54 


EPILOGUE 

of  Eunoe,  or  fair  memory;  and  a  little  after  Dante 
has  drunk  of  Lethe  he  drinks  of  Eunoe  also.  To  live 
the  life  of  Innocence  not  only  detaches  the  soul  from 
all  sense  of  fellowship  with  evil,  but  quickens  in  it 
all  memories  of  good  and  brings  them  back  from 
oblivion  with  all  their  deep  significance  revealed. 
This  is  the  last  and  most  perfect  gift  of  the  recovered 
Eden  to  Dante's  pilgrim  soul  and  to  all  others  who 
pass  that  way.  And  so  we  find  that  the  once  sinful 
souls  that  Dante  meets  in  heaven  have  indeed  re- 
covered the  memory  of  their  sins,  but  remember 
them  not  with  any  lingering  sense  that  they  belong 
to  them,  but  only  as  the  occasions  that  prompted  the 
redeeming  grace  that  now  has  undisputed  sway  in 
their  triumphant  sense  of  fruition.  Rejoicing  in  the 
perfect  will  of  God,  and  finding  therein  their  peace, 
they  find  their  own  forgiveness  there  and  they  forgive 
themselves. 

Paradiio  ix  :   34-36,  103-108. 


55 


<P'^%^T   II 
THE    MINOR    WORKS 


In  honorem 

KAROLI    WITTE 


^<^%r  II 

THE    MINOR    WORKS 
(In  the  light  of  the  Comedy) 

Dante*s  life,  and  the  record  of  it  contained  in  his 
works,  culminate  in  the  Comedy  ;  and  just  as  the 
earlier  parts  of  the  Comedy  reveal  their  full  meaning 
only  when  related  to  the  Earthly  Paradise  and  to 
Heaven,  so  Dante's  Minor  Works,  in  their  turn, 
only  acquire  their  true  significance  when  we  regard 
them  as  the  preparation  for  the  Comedy,  fore- 
shadowing it  half-consciously,  or  unconsciously 
leading  up  to  it.  I  assume  a  general  acquaintance 
with  these  Minor  Works  themselves,  especially  the 
Vita  Nuova^  the  Canzoni  or  Odes,  the  Cortvivio^  and 
the  Monarchia  ;  and,  taking  them  severally,  I  shall 
first  offer  some  comments  and  reflections  upon  them 
on  their  own  merits,  and  then  try  in  each  case  to  re- 
late them  to  their  final  outcome  in  the  Comedy.  We 
must  begin,  of  course,  with  the  Vita  Nuova, 

I.    THE    **VITA    NUOVa" 

When  Dante,  in  his  eighteenth  year,  wrote  the  first 
poem  that  we  possess  from  him,  or  that  he  himself 
acknowledges,  there  was  nothing  to  distinguish  his 
general  conception  of  Italian  poetry  from  that  of  his 
fellow-citizens.  Other  young  Florentines  of  birth 
and  position  were  writing  love-poems  in  the  verna- 
cular ;  and  their  vocabulary,  verse-forms,  and  tradi- 
tional images  had  already  been  highly  elaborated, 

59 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

and,  in  the  artistic  sense  of  the  term,  convention- 
alized. The  personification  of  Love,  the  potency  of 
the  loved  one*s  salutation,  the  regenerative  influence 
of  enamourment,  conferring,  as  it  were,  a  patent  of 
nobility  on  the  true  lover  and  raising  the  whole  tone 
of  his  life,  are  common  form  with  this  group  of  poets. 
But  in  no  other  field  had  the  Tuscan  vernacular  re- 
ceived so  high  a  degree  of  elaboration  as  a  literary 
instrument.  Italian  was  indeed  already  used  in  Italy 
for  many  purposes  of  instruction,  but  the  Tuscan 
tradition  confined  its  artistic  scope  to  love-lyrics 
only  ;  and  Dante  and  his  elder  friend  Guido  Caval- 
canti  evidently  thought  it  would  be  a  startling  im- 
propriety to  cultivate  in  the  vulgar  tongue  any  other 
branch  of  literature  proper.  Dante  finds  the  justifica- 
tion of  withdrawing  this  one  branch  of  literature 
from  the  domain  of  Latin  and  transferring  it  to  the 
common  speech,  in  the  necessity  of  writing  love- 
poetry  in  a  language  which  could  be  generally  under- 
stood and  even  critically  appreciated,  by  women ; 
and  it  would  appear  that  the  Florentine  ladies,  at  any 
rate,  were  in  fact  keenly  interested  in  this  nascent 
poetry  and  that  the  references  to  their  incisive 
judgements  and  appreciations  which  we  meet  in 
extant  poems  or  in  the  traditions  that  surround  them 
were  far  from  being  mere  formal  compliments. 

Thus,  when  Dante  felt  the  "  new  life  **  of  the 
higher  sensibilities  and  perceptions  awakened  in  him 
by  his  early  meeting  with  Beatrice  ;  when  this  life 
was  nurtured  and  matured  by  his  bashful  contem- 
plation of  the  opening  beauty  of  soul  that  revealed 

60 


THE     "vita      NUOVa" 

itself  in  her  gracious  ways  ;  when  he  was  thrilled  by 
a  casual  interchange  of  civilities  or  deeply  troubled 
by  real  or  fancied  slights  ;  and,  finally,  when  he 
reached  the  unassailable  security  of  a  devotion  that 
demanded  neither  graceful  acknowledgement  nor 
even  bare  comprehension  in  return,  he  inevitably  be- 
came Beatrice's  poet ;  and  then,  after  death  had 
removed  her  visible  presence  and  other  interests  or 
passions  began  to  dispute  the  unique  place  she  had 
occupied  in  his  heart,  he  regarded  them,  for  a  time, 
as  temptations  to  take  up  life  on  a  lower  plane  instead 
of  allowing  it  to  be  further  refined  and  ennobled  by 
yet  deeper  devotion  to  his  now  glorified  lady.  At  the 
end  of  his  own  idealized  record,  in  which  he  weaves 
selected  poems,  on  a  ground  of  a  continuous  prose 
narrative,  into  the  ethereal  texture  known  as  the 
Vita  Nuovay  he  closes  on  the  note  suggested  by  a 
wondrous  vision  which  rebaptized  his  early  manhood 
in  the  waters  that  had  consecrated  his  childish  soul 
to  the  service  of  beauty,  truth,  and  goodness  :  and  he 
aspires  if  his  life  endures  to  write  of  Beatrice  **  what 
ne'er  was  writ  of  woman.** 

It  was  on  the  eighth  day  of  June  in  1290  that 
Beatrice  died.  Dante  was  twenty-four  or  possibly 
just  twenty-five  years  old,  and  the  Vita  Nuova  must 
have  been  completed,  in  the  form  in  which  we  now 
have  it,  within  one  or  two  years  of  this  time. 

How  large  a  place  in  the  young  citizen  and 
soldier's  life  was  actually  occupied  by  his  ideal  pas- 

Fita  NuovM  xxv,  especially  43-5 !  [6  /f .].  Cf.  xxxi :  1 3-24  [xxx  : 
2  if.],  for  the  obverse  principle. 

61 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

sion  it  is  impossible  to  say.  It  is  certain  that  he 
entered  eagerly  into  many  phases  of  the  rich  and 
varied  life  of  Florence  in  that  marvellous  period  of 
its  history.  He  was  well  read  in  the  Latin  poets  and 
in  the  current  Latin  translations  of  Aristotle,  and  he 
had  a  good  knowledge  of  astronomy  ;  but  he  did 
not  regard  himself  as  a  student,  and  had  apparently 
acquired  his  knowledge  and  formed  his  taste  for 
literature,  much  as  an  Athenian  of  the  age  of  Pericles 
might  have  done,  under  the  reaction  to  his  environ- 
ment as  a  well-born  citizen  of  **  the  Great  City  "  on 
the  Arno. 

The  external  means  of  gratifying  and  developing 
his  powers  would  come  of  themselves,  and  would 
hardly  need  to  be  sought  by  one  who  lived  in  the 
fellowship  of  the  minds  and  in  practice  of  the  affairs 
which  made  that  city  great.  We  know,  too,  that  he 
was  amongst  the  fore  fighters  in  the  battle  of  Cam- 
paldino  in  the  year  before  Beatrice's  death  ;  and 
his  extant  poems,  outside  the  canon  of  the  Vita 
Nuova  but  belonging  to  the  period  covered  by  its 
composition,  show  that  without  passing  beyond  the 
limits  of  the  recognized  love-theme  and  without  de- 
flection to  any  of  its  baser  suggestions  he  had  already 
found  room  for  a  wider  and  lighter  play  of  fancy  and 
emotion  than  could  harbour  in  the  cloistral  atmo- 
sphere of  the  monument  of  his  early  idealism. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  would  surely  be  a  profound 
misconception  to  regard  the  Vita  Nuova  as  some- 
thing apart  that  had  no  vital  connection  or  **  ex- 
change of  pulses  "  with  the  full-blooded  life  of  this 

62 


THE     "vita      NUOVa" 

Florentine  soldier  and  man  of  society  and  affairs. 
At  its  core  it  asserts  itself  as  a  genuine  account  of  the 
birth  in  his  soul  of  the  love  of  beauty,  goodness,  and 
truth  ;  the  conviction  that  these  are  realities  and 
not  mere  dreams  ;  and  the  consciousness  of  a  mission 
to  make  them  real  to  others.  This  mission  in  its  suc- 
cessive transformations  was  the  inspiration  of  his 
life,  and  it  led  him  at  last  to  the  Beatific  Vision. 
In  the  first  chapters  of  the  Vita  Nuova^  therefore, 
we  read  the  beginnings  of  the  life-history  which 
culminates  in  the  final  cantos  of  the  Paradiso  ;  but 
it  is  no  light  task  to  trace  the  links  between  the  be- 
ginning and  the  end  ;  and  as  the  initial  step  in  any 
such  attempt  we  must  note  with  closer  attention 
certain  details  in  the  Vita  Nuova  the  full  significance 
of  which  might  well  escape  our  notice. 

The  first  point  to  observe  concerns  those  elaborate 
love-guiles  which  probably  cause  a  vague  uneasiness 
to  many  ingenuous  readers  who  perhaps  hardly  like 
to  recognize  it  even  to  themselves.  No  doubt  it  is 
natural  for  any  sensitive  soul  to  wish  to  shield  its 
inmost  life  from  the  intrusions  of  curiosity.  But  here, 
in  Dante's  case,  the  influence  of  the  Provencal 
Troubadours  is  clearly  discernible  in  the  light  under 
which  he  places  the  events  he  narrates.  Unmarried 
women  were  almost  inaccessible  in  Proven(;al  society, 
whereas  young  married  ladies  were  the  centres  of 
brilliant  circles  of  admiration,  compliment,  and 
chivalrous  service.  It  was  to  them  that  the  Trou- 
badours paid  their  court,  and  as  the  singer  always 
professed  to  be  very  seriously  in  love  with  his  lady 

63 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

secrecy  became  a  fixed  convention  in  their  poetic 
tradition.  The  Troubadour's  lady  must  never  be 
addressed  in  his  poems  under  her  own  name. 

Should  her  identity  be  suspected  means  must  be 
taken  to  mislead  the  "  busy-bodies,**  for  whom,  in 
Troubadour  literature,  there  is  a  special  technical 
term.  They  are  sometimes  spoken  of  almost  as  if 
they  were  an  organized  body  of  malignant  perse- 
cutors of  all  true  lovers,  like  "  the  Jews  "  who  lower 
as  a  dark  background  in  the  Fourth  Gospel.  The 
whole  scheme  was  obviously  in  many  cases  a  mere 
traditional  form.  The  great  lady  no  doubt  would 
take  the  homage  of  her  minstrel  for  the  most  part  in 
perfect  innocence,  just  for  what  it  was  worth  ;  and 
the  supposed  secrecy  would  conceal  nothing  and 
would  have  nothing  to  conceal.  An  enlightening 
though  obviously  imperfect  parallel  may  be  found  in 
the  poetic  worship  of  Gloriana  by  the  Elizabethan 
poets.  Nevertheless,  the  convention  had  its  ultimate 
ground  in  the  actual  social  conditions  of  the  Trou- 
badour environment.  There  were  certainly  cases  in 
which  it  closely  corresponded  with  the  fact ;  and  in 
such  cases  it  became  a  matter  of  consequence  to 
maintain  a  real  secrecy. 

In  Dante's  Florence,  on  the  contrary,  there  was 
no  vital  sap  in  this  convention  ;  for  the  social  con- 
ditions and  customs  were  not  such  as  to  support  it 
in  any  way.  So  when  we  find  the  Vita  Nuova  follow- 
ing the  almost  stereotyped  course  of  enamourment, 
concealment  by  love-guiles,  misunderstandings, 
scandalous  imputations,  exculpation,  and  explana- 

64 


THE      "vita      NUOVa" 

tion  it  is  impossible  not  to  recognize  the  force  of  the 
Troubadour  tradition  which  may  well  have  reacted 
unconsciously  upon  Dante*s  real  conduct  and  feelings 
at  the  time,  and  more  consciously  perhaps  upon  his 
subsequent  interpretation  and  record  of  them. 
Again,  when  we  read  his  extant  poems  of  this  period 
(some  of  which  have  been  recovered  quite  recently), 
and  see  that  the  "  feigned  "  poetic  addresses  were 
occasionally  carried  further  than  the  narrative  of  the 
Vita  Nuova  would  suggest,  the  suspicion  may  well 
rise  in  our  minds  that  the  passing  susceptibilities  of 
a  young  man's  heart  gave  a  greater  sincerity  to  some 
of  his  poems  to  his  **  screen  '*  ladies  than  he  after- 
wards chose  to  admit.  Such  speculations,  however, 
must  in  any  case  be  left  as  mere  conjectures.  What 
is  certain  is  that  not  until  the  traditional  cycle  has 
been  completed,  and  not  till  the  memorable  rebuke 
administered  to  the  poet  by  a  lady  belonging  to 
Beatrice's  circle  has  shaken  him  out  of  his  self- 
consciousness  and  artificiality,  does  the  pure  stream 
of  lyric  rapture  by  which  the  Vita  Nuova  lives  begin 
to  flow.  It  is  in  the  first  seventeen  sections  that  the 
Troubadour  scaffoldage  is  clearly  apparent  to  the 
practised  eye  ;  and  it  is  after  this  that  all  the  poems 
occur  which  either  Dante  himself  or  any  of  his 
admirers  quote  for  their  own  sake. 

It  is  here  that  the  baldanza  d' amove — the  triumph 
and  exultation  of  Dante's  love — pours  out  its  rich, 
undying  utterance. 

And  again,  if  the  earlier  chapters  of  the  Vita 
Vita  Nuova  xviii. 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

Nuova  echo  the  scheme  of  the  Troubadour  "pro- 
gress of  love  "  the  prose  poem  in  its  entirety  may  be 
said  to  foreshadow  in  a  certain  sense  the  entire 
scheme  of  the  Comedy,  and  therefore  to  become  a 
kind  of  symboHc  epitome  of  the  whole  history  of  man 
as  conceived  and  set  forth  by  the  Church.  For  in  the 
Vita  Nuova^  too,  as  in  the  Comedy,  there  is  an 
Earthly  Paradise  and  a  Fall,  and  there  is  a  recovery 
that  reopens  the  gate  of  Heaven.  The  whole  tale  of 
Dante's  early  love  is  surrounded  by  the  breath  of 
Eden.  The  shadowy  suggestion  of  a  Fall  appears 
when  in  the  later  portion  of  the  Vita  Nuova  Dante 
admits  a  temporary  fluctuation  in  his  heart's  devo- 
tion ;  and,  whatever  may  have  been  the  case  with  the 
earlier  "screen*'  maidens,  we  are  now,  at  the  close, 
in  presence  of  a  veritable  conflict  of  emotions. 
The  story  of  the  Pitiful  Lady,  towards  love  of  whom 
Dante  was  swayed  in  his  affliction,  is  a  touching  re- 
cord of  a  human  experience  fully  intelligible  to  every 
human  soul  and  reflecting  not  the  smallest  discredit 
upon  its  hero.  Yet  it  is  treated  by  Dante  as  though 
it  were  a  kind  of  lapse  from  grace  that  banished  him 
from  his  Eden.  The  episode  stands  quite  outside  the 
traditional  framework,  and  the  very  fact  that,  as  every 
reader  feels,  it  perplexes  the  artistic  symmetry  and 
beauty  of  the  work,  is  a  pledge  of  its  sincerity  as  a  record. 
This,  then,  is  the  story  :  A  little  more  than  a  year 
after  Beatrice's  death  Dante  noticed  that  a  certain 
Gentle  Lady,  who  could  see  him  from  her  window, 
appeared  to  regard  his  forlorn  and  desolate  state  with 
compassion  ;  and  he  found  a  strange  comfort  in  the 

66 


THE     "vita     NUOVa" 

flow  of  tears  which  her  sympathy  drew  from  his  eyes. 
Gradually  he  began  to  suspect  that  it  was  more  her 
own  presence  and  tenderness  than  any  quickening 
of  his  thoughts  of  Beatrice  that  moved  him,  and  he 
was  shocked  to  think  that  he  was  already  half-faith- 
less to  the  memory  that  was  the  consecration  of  his 
life.  Then  he  began  to  ask  himself  whether  this 
gracious  presence  was  not  really  a  message  from 
Love  himself :  a  message  of  comfort  and  of  renewed 
life ;  an  invitation  to  come  back  from  brooding  over 
the  darkness  of  his  loss  into  the  light  of  present 
beauty  and  joy  ?  For  a  moment  the  new  emotion 
triumphed,  but  only  to  reveal  its  own  inadequacy. 
It  was  the  desolate  cry  for  consolation  that  had 
thrown  him  upon  a  **  second  best  '*  when  his  only 
manly  course  was  to  endure  and  to  work  through 
his  affliction  to  a  yet  higher  life  of  realization.  A 
vision  of  Beatrice,  the  red-robed  child  of  eight  years, 
as  he  had  first  seen  her,  brought  back  his  wandering 
heart  from  this  unworthy  yearning,  and  in  **  grievous 
penitence  "  he  fixed  all  his  thoughts  once  more  upon 
Beatrice.  Not  long  afterwards  he  wrote  the  final  . 
sonnet  of  the  Ft  fa  Nuova,  wherein  he  tells  us  (the^ 
translation  is  Rossetti*s)  how  : 

Beyond  the  sphere  which  spreads  to  widest  space 
Now  soars  the  sigh  that  my  heart  sends  above  : 
A  new  perception  born  of  grieving  Love 

Guiding  it  upward  the  untrodden  ways. 

When  it  hath  reached  unto  the  end,  and  stays, 
It  lees  a  lady  round  whom  splendours  move 
In  homage  :  till,  by  the  great  light  thereof 

Abashed,  the  pilgrim  spirit  stands  at  gaze. 

67 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

It  sees  her  such  that  when  it  tells  me  this 
Which  it  hath  seen  I  understand  it  not — 
It  hath  a  speech  so  subtle  and  so  fine. 
And  yet  I  know  its  voice  within  my  thought 
Often  remembereth  me  of  Beatrice  : 
So  that  I  understand  it,  ladies  mine. 

Compare  this  with  the  lines  in  the  first  Canto  of  the 
Paradiso : 

In  that  heaven  which  most  receiveth  of  his  light  have  I  been  ;  and 
have  seen  things  which  whoso  thence  descends  hath  nor  know- 
ledge nor  power  to  retell : 

For,  as  it  draws  anigh  to  its  desire  our  intellect  plunges  so  deep  that 
memory  cannot  follow  in  the  track. 

Nathless,  whatever  of  the  holy  realm  I  could  up-treasure  in  my 
memory  shall  now  be  matter  of  my  poesy .^ 

Thus  does  the  Vita  Nuova  already  faintly  fore- 
shadow the  Paradisoy  and  with  it  the  essential  sub- 
jects of  the  Comedy  as  a  whole. 

But  we  have  not  yet  read  quite  the  last  word  of  the 
Vita  Nuova  ;  and  that  last  word  is  the  most  signi- 
ficant of  all  from  our  present  point  of  inquiry. 
"  After  this  sonnet,"  Dante  says,  "  there  appeared 
to  me  a  wondrous  vision  which  made  me  purpose  to 

^  Nel  ciel  che  piu  della  sua  luce  prende 

fu'  io,  e  vidi  cose  che  ridire 

ne  sa  ne  puo  chi  di  lassu  discende ; 
Perche,  appressando  se  al  suo  desire, 

nostro  intelletto  si  profonda  tanto, 

che  retro  la  memoria  non  puo  ire. 
Veramente  quant*  io  del  regno  santo 

nella  mia  mente  potei  far  tesoro, 

sar^  ora  materia  del  mio  canto. 

Paradiso  i:  4-12. 

68 


THE     "vita      NUOVa" 

write  no  more  of  this  blessed  one  until  such  time  as  I 
might  treat  of  her  more  worthily.  And  to  come  at 
this  I  study  all  I  may,  as  she  knoweth  verily.  So  that, 
if  it  be  His  pleasure  by  whom  all  things  live  that 
my  life  endure  some  few  years,  I  hope  to  write  of  her 
what  ne*er  was  writ  of  woman."  Then  follows  the 
concluding  prayer  that  when  this  task  shall  be  ac- 
complished he  may  behold  the  glory  of  his  lady  **  as 
she  looks  upon  the  face  of  Him  who  is  blessed  for 
evermore.'* 

This  would  seem  to  lead  straight  to  the  Paradiso  ; 
but  we  have  only  to  study  the  Comedy  in  its  entirety 
to  see  that  there  lies  much  between  this  early  vow 
and  its  fulfilment,  and  that  before  it  was  finally  ac- 
complished it  had  already  been  broken,  and  that 
more  than  once.  In  the  Purgatorio  we  read  of  Dante's 
meeting  with  Beatrice  in  the  Earthly  Paradise,  and 
we  find  that  not  only  does  she  charge  him  with 
persistent,  nay  stubborn,  faithlessness  to  the  life  and 
ideals  to  which  she  had  raised  him,  but  she  also  de- 
clares explicitly  that,  through  dreams  and  what 
pleadings  else,  she  herself  had  called  him  back  from 
his  wanderings  on  the  false  path — and  had  called 
in  vain,  **  so  little  did  he  heed  her."  It  is  quite  im- 
possible to  take  this  as  referring  to  the  innocent 
yearning  during  **  certain  days  "  for  human  comfort 
and  affection  after  Beatrice's  death,  as  recounted  in 
the  Fita  Nuova,  There  had  evidently  been  some  far 
more  real  and  deeper  Fall  between  the  Eden  of  the 

Fita  Nuova  xliii  [xlii].  Purgatorio  xxx,  xxxi,  especially  xxx : 
133-135.  Fita  Nuova  xl :  13  [xxxix  :  2]. 

69 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

Vita  Nuova  and  the  journey  of  recovery  recorded  in 
the  Inferno  and  the  Purgatorio.  The  "  wondrous 
vision  '*  at  the  close  of  the  Vita  Nuova  cannot  there- 
fore be  the  great  revelation  that  was  afterwards  dis- 
tilled, line  by  line,  into  the  terzine  of  the  Comedy. 
It  must  be  one  of  those  fruitlessly  tender  attempts  to 
arrest  the  wayward  steps  of  the  poet  on  his  down- 
ward path  to  which  Beatrice  alludes  as  preceding  her 
appeal  to  Virgil  for  help. 

We  saw  from  the  first  that  it  might  prove  a  diffi- 
cult task  to  trace  the  promise  of  the  Vita  Nuova  up  to 
its  fulfilment  in  the  Comedy,  and  now  we  need  not 
be  surprised  if  the  first  steps  seem  rather  to  recede 
from  the  goal  than  to  approach  it.  With  this  secure 
knowledge,  then,  of  the  starting-point  and  the  end, 
with  this  anticipation  of  the  intervening  obstacles 
and  vacillations,  and  with  this  warning  that  Dante 
himself  may  not  always  have  wished  to  leave  his 
actual  footprints  clear  for  us  to  trace,  we  may  now 
go  forward  with  the  task  of  following  the  succession 
of  the  poet's  works  and  gaining  what  light  we  can 
from  them  as  to  the  antecedents  of  his  supreme 
achievement. 


II.    THE    "CANZONI** 

Dante's  banishment  from  Florence  took  place 
about  eleven  and  a  half  years  after  Beatrice's  death, 
say  ten  years  after  the  completion  of  the  Vita  Nuova, 

Purgatorio  xxx  :   1 3  6- 1 4 1 . 

70 


THE     "CANZONi" 


What  can  we  know  of  his  life  during  these  years  ? 
There  are  records,  too  scanty  but  authentic  as  far  as 
they  go,  of  poHtical  and  official  activities,  on  which 
we  shall  touch  in  connection  with  a  later  period. 
There  are  certified  copies  of  legal  instruments  which 
show  that,  in  partnership  with  his  brother  or  on  his 
sole  responsibility,  he  contracted  very  considerable 
debts  during  these  years,  debts  which  were  not 
liquidated  till  after  his  death.  We  know  that  he  was 
married  to  Gemma,  of  the  great  house  of  the  Donati, 
and  that  he  had  at  least  four  children  by  her.  Of  his 
domestic  life  before  his  exile  we  know  nothing. 
The  later  tradition  that  he  and  Gemma  lived  un- 
happily together  is  without  any  substantive  founda- 
tion. The  very  little  we  know  of  Gemma  herself, 
who  survived  her  husband  for  many  years,  is  entirely 
to  her  credit.  For  anything  beyond  these  bare  facts 
we  must  rely  upon  Dante's  own  works  and  an  am- 
biguous reference  to  him,  here  and  there,  by  his 
contemporaries. 

In  the  Purgatorio  there  is,'  in  addition  to  the  re- 
proaches of  Beatrice  and  the  answering  confession 
of  the  poet,  a  remarkable  passage  that  has  specific 
reference  to  the  years  now  under  consideration.  It 
is  where  Dante  meets  his  friend  Forese  Donati,  who 
was  a  relative  of  his  wife's,  and  who  died  in  1296. 
Dante  says  to  him  that  the  way  they  spent  their  lives 
in  the  years  of  their  companionship  must  be  of 
grievous  memory  to  both  of  them;  and  declares,  as 
from  the  fictitious  or  ideal  date  of  Easter  1 300,  that 
he  himself  is  only  now  being  rescued  from  that  kind 

71 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

of  life  by  Virgil.  There  still  survives  an  exchange  of 
Sonnets  between  the  two  friends  Dante  and  Forese. 
They  are  on  a  distinctly  lower  level  than  anything 
else  that  we  have  from  Dante's  hand,  but  there  is 
nothing  in  them  seriously  to  tarnish  his  good  name. 

There  is  better  material  for  the  reconstruction  of 
Dante's  intellectual  life  and  development  during  this 
decade  in  the  series  of  Canzoni^  or  Odes,  which  have 
come  down  to  us.  The  Canzone  is  a  beautiful  form 
of  verse  which  the  Italians  had  elaborated  and 
systematized,  from  the  practice  of  the  Troubadours, 
till  it  became  an  instrument  of  unrivalled  power  for 
the  expression  of  varied  emotions.  Dante  could 
work  with  supreme  effectiveness  under  the  combined 
severity  and  elasticity  of  this  exquisite  species  of 
composition,  of  which  he  was  truly  enamoured. 
And  to  the  end  of  his  days,  though  he  had  poured  out 
his  whole  soul  in  his  own  Terza  Rima^  he  doubtless 
regarded  the  Canzone 2iS  the  most  exalted  and  majestic 
form  of  Italian  poetry. 

The  decade  on  which  we  are  now  engaged  is  pre- 
eminently the  period  of  the  Canzone  in  Dante's  poetic 
career,  though  he  had  done  great  things  with  it  be- 
fore and  was  to  do  great  things  with  it  again. 

Now,  some  of  these  Odes  repeat  or  echo  the  motives 
of  the  Vita  Nuova  itself,  but  others  are  the  direct  ex- 
pression of  the  poet's  passion  for  study.  They  link 
themselves  to  that  resolve  to  dedicate  years  of 
strenuous  toil  to  the  task  of  making  himself  more 
worthy  to  write  of  Beatrice  with  which  the  Vita 

Purgatorio  x-nu '.  76-84,115-126. 
72 


THE     "CANZONi" 


Nuova  closes;  and  they  seem  therefore  to  follow  on 
from  that  work  rather  than  to  repeat  its  notes. 
But  what  was  animating  Dante  at  the  inception  of 
these  systematic  studies  was  surely  no  prevision  of 
the  Comedy,  but  rather,  we  may  suppose,  a  concep- 
tion that  Beatrice,  in  her  own  right,  ought  to  be  to 
others — to  all,  indeed,  who  were  worthy — what  she 
had  been  to  the  poet  himself.  If  he  could  show  her  to 
others  as  she  truly  was,  and  as  she  had  been  seen  by 
him,  then  she  would  wake  them  also  to  the  meaning 
of  life,  and  to  them,  too,  she  would  reveal  goodness, 
beauty,  and  truth  as  present  realities  and  powers. 
But  in  order  thus  to  reveal  her  he  must  pass  beyond 
the  stage  of  instinctive  perception,  and  must  analyze, 
evolve,  and  develop  all  the  implications  of  that 
higher  life  to  which  he  had  himself  been  called  and 
to  which  he  in  turn  would  fain  call  others.  He  must 
not  only  feel  the  soul,  but  must  understand  the 
instruments  and  appliances  of  that  higher  wisdom 
of  which  he  was  to  be  the  apostle.  Hence  his  new- 
born zeal  for  the  deepened  study  of  all  branches  of 
truth,  including  science,  theology,  and,  more  especi- 
ally, philosophy.  Such  study  was  now  something 
more  than  a  spontaneous  expression  of  his  intellec- 
tual alertness  and  enjoyment  of  life.  It  had  been 
drawn  into  his  mission  and  had  become  an  inspira- 
tion and  a  passion — a  passion,  as  we  shall  see,  that 
soon  acquired  independent  strength  and,  forgetting 
itself  as  a  means,  became  an  end. 

But  how  could  this  zeal  for  study  express  itself 
in  poetry  }   Here  we  may  detect  the  first  workings 

73 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

of  an  impulse,  that  runs  through  Dante's  whole 
career,  to  widen  the  scope  of  Italian  literature  and  to 
annex  one  after  another  the  provinces  over  which 
Latin  had  hitherto  reigned  undisputed.  It  is  true 
that  he  still  does  full  homage  to  the  Tuscan  tradition, 
but  he  is  already  stretching  it  to  cover  more  than  ever 
it  was  made  for  !  What  he  is  impelled  to  express 
concerns  the  hopes  and  fears  of  the  student :  his  self- 
distrust  battling  with  his  fervour  and  his  ambition, 
his  fits  of  despair,  and  the  rare  moments  of  triumph 
when  it  seemed  as  though  Philosophy  herself  were 
smiling  upon  her  devoted  servant  and  opening  to 
him  her  inmost  secrets.  But  is  not  this  the  very 
theme  of  love  ?  Surely  he  who  woos  Philosophy  may 
best  tell  of  his  passion  in  the  consecrated  forms  of 
the  love  lyric.  Hence  comes  the  series  of  **  alle- 
gorical "  poems  in  which  the  lady  of  the  poet*s  vows 
is  none  other  than  my  Lady  Philosophy  herself; 
and  the  passion  that  now  sighs  and  pleads,  and  now 
rises  to  awe-struck  and  half-tremulous  exultation,  is 
the  intellectual  love  that  woos  that  exalted  mistress. 

To  the  sympathetic  reader  there  should  be  no 
difficulty  in  determining  which  of  Dante's  poems 
belong  to  this  allegorizing  group.  The  test  is  a 
simple  one.  Does  the  "  allegorical,''  that  is,  the 
philosophical,  interpretation  of  the  poem  make  it 
more,  or  does  it  make  it  less,  psychologically  con- 
vincing ?  If  what  seem  like  mere  elegances  or  con- 
ceits when  literally  interpreted  begin  to  glow  when 
referred  to  the  experiences  of  the  baffled  but  in- 
domitable student,  then  Philosophy  is  the  lady  of  the 

74 


THE     "CANZONI 


poet's  love.  If  the  passion  becomes  pale,  the  images 
less  vivid,  and  the  expression  strained  when  Philo- 
sophy is  substituted  for  a  human  personality,  then 
it  would  be  wronging  Dante's  genius  to  take  the 
poems  on  any  other  footing  than  as  love-poems  in  the 
primary  sense.  And  this  wrong  we  must  not  do  him 
even  though  it  should  be  at  his  own  bidding  1 

It  is  indeed  obvious  that  the  application  of  this 
canon  must  be  purely  subjective  ;  yet  it  seems  safe 
to  say  that  students  who  frankly  accept  it  will  not 
differ  very  materially  in  the  conclusions  to  which  it 
leads  them. 

We  must  follow  a  little  further  yet  this  widening 
of  the  domain  of  love-rhymes,  and  therefore  of 
Italian  literature.  Dante  was  stirred  during  this 
period  by  many  other  thoughts  besides  those  of  the 
purely  speculative  student.  He  was  a  keen  observer 
of  the  social  conditions  and  manners  around  him, 
and  his  wrath  or  contempt  was  moved  by  the  vulgar 
pretender  to  grace  and  elegance,  the  selfish  and 
sordid  man  of  wealth,  or  the  soulless  herd  whose 
only  conception  of  **  nobility  **  was  a  combination  of 
distinguished  birth  with  riches,  or  at  best  with  the 
conventional  tone  of  good  society.  In  short,  as  he 
studied  Aristotle's  Ethics,  let  us  say,  he  not  only 
speculated  on  moral  problems,  but  felt  the  **  tearing 
indignation  "  of  the  Roman  satirist  raging  within 
him  and  forcing  him  to  utterance.  Despite  all  his 
theories,  impassioned  speech  on  such  subjects  must 
shape  itself  for  him  in  that  vernacular  to  which 
(notwithstanding  his  reverence  for   Latin  and  his 

75 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

easy,  forceful  handling  of  it)  he  felt  a  connatural 
affinity  that  would  not  be  denied. 

But  how  were  such  themes  to  be  brought  within 
the  Tuscan  tradition  as  to  Italian  poetry?  Dante  had 
already  prepared  the  way  for  himself  unconsciously. 
In  the  Vita  Nuova  Beatrice  is  never  an  isolated  figure. 
She  is  at  a  wedding  party,  or  in  church,  or  she  is 
weeping  at  the  bedside  of  a  lost  friend,  or  walking 
between  two  companions.  The  poet  delights  to  sur- 
round the  central  figure  of  his  lady-love  with  little 
insets  and  medallions  representing  the  gracious  com- 
pany of  maidens  amongst  whom  she  moved,  and 
with  whom  he  might  hold  converse  concerning  her 
even  when  she  herself  withheld  her  salutation.^ 
Now,  to  the  mediaeval  student,  and  pre-eminently  to 
Dante,  abstract  study  was  conceived  not  only  as 
having  in  itself  an  elevating  effect  upon  the  mind, 
but  as  closely  allied  to  all  the  virtues.  Should 
Philosophy  be  Dante's  mistress,  then  Generosity, 
true  Nobility,  Graciousness,  Justice,  and  all  their 
train  are,  to  him,  his  Lady's  court ;  and  these  may  be 
celebrated  by  her  poet  if  he  dare  not,  or  may  not, 
come  into  her  immediate  presence,  or  if  he  cannot 
rise  to  the  full  height  of  his  central  theme.  Thus,  if 
he  writes  of  true  Nobility  he  expressly  explains  that 

Cf.  Convivio  I.  lii,  xiii. 

^  This  feature  of  the  Fita  Nuova  is  the  more  significant  inasmuch 
as,  so  far  as  I  remember,  no  Troubadour  ever  represents  his  lady  as 
in  any  such  personal  relations  or  concrete  environment.  She  is  always 
the  isolated  object  of  his  devotion,  and  is  never  seen  in  the  ordinary 
occupations  or  associations  of  life.  It  is  only  what  directly  concerns 
her  relations  to  him  or  his  to  her  that  receives  any  notice. 

76 


THE     "CANZONi" 

it  is  because  his  Lady  is  unpropitious,  and  he  must 
for  a  time  drop  those  sweet  rhymes  of  which  she  is 
the  object,  hoping  to  return  to  them  when  she 
smiles  upon  him  once  more  ;  and  meanwhile  he 
will  at  least  sing  of  her  friends  and  so  keep  near  her 
presence.  In  the  prose  commentary  which  he  after- 
wards composed  he  explains  this  to  mean  that  once, 
when  a  particularly  intricate  problem  of  abstract 
philosophy  baffled  him,  he  turned  aside  for  relief  to 
a  question  concerning  one  of  the  virtues,  so  as  still 
to  keep  himself  within  the  environment  of  his  Lady 
even  when  she  herself  rejected  his  homage.  In 
Dante's  Odes,  or  Cartzom,  then,  we  have  abundant 
evidence  of  his  devotion  to  study,  of  his  broadening 
social  and  moral  observation,  and  of  the  pressure 
which  his  artistic  genius  was  already  bringing  to 
bear  upon  conventional  limitations  of  vernacular 
poetry. 

But  this  is  not  all.  Amongst  the  poems  assigned 
by  common  consent  to  this  same  decade  some  of  the 
most  splendid  breathe  a  mundane  passion — **  a 
terrible  and  tormenting  love,"  as  it  has  been  called, 
— equally  remote  from  the  atmosphere  of  the  Fifa 
Nuova,  of  the  Philosophical  love-poems,  and  of  the 
Paradiso,  Here  for  the  first  time  we  come  upon 
manifestations  of  Dante's  genius  which  seem  not 
so  much  to  lie  outside  as  to  cut  clean  across  the  line 
of  progress  from  the  Vita  Nuova  to  the  Paradiso, 

Convivio  IV,  lines  1-20  of  the  Canzone,  and  chapter  i.  Cf.  Can- 
zone lix  [Rim.  Ixiiiii],  Poscia  ch*Amor :  1-19. 

77 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

That  he  actually  met  such  **  cross  ditches  **^  on  his 
path  we  already  know  from  the  whole  structure  of 
the  Comedy,  and  more  especially  from  Beatrice's 
reproaches  and  Dante's  confession  in  the  Earthly 
Paradise.  We  shall  in  due  course  see  reason  to  con- 
nect these  said  "  cross  ditches  '*  with  the  poems  we 
are  now  considering.  They  are  known  as  the 
"  Pietra  **  group,  because  the  constant  play  upon 
the  word  "  pietra  " — stone  or  jewel — suggests  that 
Pietra  was  the  name  of  the  lady  whom  they  concern. 

If  we  now  put  together  all  that  we  have  gathered 
of  Dante's  life  during  this  period  and  survey  it  in 
the  light  of  Beatrice's  reproachful  declaration  that 
she  had  in  spirit  again  and  again  called  him,  but 
called  in  vain,  back  to  the  nobler  life  to  which  she 
had  for  a  time  uplifted  him,  we  can  no  longer  doubt 
that  what  Dante  ultimately  regarded  as  his  real  Fall 
was  subsequent  to  the  compilation  of  the  Vita  Nuova, 
If  he  continued  to  think  at  all  of  the  episode  of  the 
Gentle  Lady  in  whose  sympathy  he  had  once  sought 
comfort  the  impression  might  almost  merge  itself  in 
later  experiences  as  a  mere  foreshadowing  of  them  ; 
but  in  itself  it  cannot  form  the  ground  of  the  burning 
shame  he  feels  when  standing  face  to  face  with 
Beatrice. 

We  need  not  attempt  to  give  precision  to  the 

^  Purgatorio  1.J.TL '.  25—27. 

Quai  fossi  attraversati  o  quai  catene 
trovasti,  per  che  del  passare  innanzi 
douesti  cosi  spogliar  la  spene  ? 

Fide  more  especially  Canzone  xii  [Rim.  ciii]. 

78 


THE     "CANZONi" 


grounds  of  Dante*s  confession  in  the  Earthly  Para- 
dise. It  is  easy  to  see  that  there  were  breaches  of 
what  he  himself  sincerely  regarded  as  divine  ordin- 
ances which  nevertheless  woke  no  spontaneous  re- 
pugnance in  his  own  mind  and  carried  no  implication 
of  baseness  when  he  contemplated  them  in  others, 
which  yet  might  become  the  cause  of  keen  self- 
reproach  if  he  had  himself  fallen  into  them.  His 
deepening  sense  of  a  moral  and  religious  mission 
may  have  held  up  a  standard  ever  more  and  more 
exacting,  and  may  have  thrown  back  upon  his  past 
life  a  more  and  more  searching  light,  casting  an  ever 
darkening  shadow  upon  some  of  its  episodes.  Or  he 
may  for  a  time  have  actually  exhibited  that  combina- 
tion, not  rare  in  natures  of  exceptional  energy,  of  high 
devotion  to  intellectual  pursuits  with  an  addiction  to 
mundane  pleasures  and  indulgences,  felt  even  at  the 
time  to  be  unworthy,  and  crossed  by  haunting 
memories  of  purer  ideals — ideals  sometimes  clung 
to  for  support  and  sometimes  evaded  to  escape  their 
rebuke. 

All  we  know  (and  we  need  not  care  to  know  more) 
is,  on  the  one  hand,  that  to  Dante*s  sensitive  con- 
science there  came  a  time  when  the  contrast  between 
what  he  had  loved  and  what  he  had  been,  caused  the 
bitter  shame  which  stands  confessed  in  the  Purgatorio\ 
and,  on  the  other  hand,  that  the  terzine  of  the 
Paradiso  bear  their  own  witness  that  they  flow  from  a 
heart  no  longer  at  war  with  itself,  no  longer  oscil- 
lating between  renewed  and  broken  vows,  no  longer 
seeking  compromises  or  evasions  between  the  ideals 

79 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

of  the  saint  and  the  accepted  standards  of  the  man 
of  the  world.  The  flame  of  the  Faradiso  is  smokeless. 
We  have  this  foreknowledge  of  the  end,  but  mean- 
while it  seems  impossible  not  to  recognize  certain  in- 
directions and  mental  evasions  in  which  for  a  time 
Dante's  progress  was  entangled. 

III.    THE  "CONVIVIO"   IN    ITS    APOLOGETIC 
ASPECT 

In  the  early  years  of  his  exile  Dante  began  a 
treatise  (which  remained  incomplete)  on  the  Italian 
language  in  its  relation  both  to  other  vernaculars,  and 
to  Latin.  He  dealt  with  the  dialectical  varieties  of 
Italian  and,  above  all,  with  the  structure  of  its 
recognized  metrical  forms  and  the  possibility  of 
fixing  a  standard  literary  Italian  which  every  in- 
habitant of  Italy  should  recognize  as  his  language 
but  none  should  be  able  to  claim  as  his  dialect.  The 
chief  biographical  and  personal  interest  of  this 
treatise  is  to  be  found  in  the  evidence  it  furnishes  on 
three  points  :  (i)  On  Dante's  continued  concern 
with  literature,  and  specifically  with  Italian  poetry, 
at  a  period  when  his  own  poetic  inspiration  appears 
to  have  been  staunched  for  the  time  by  the  up- 
heavals of  his  life  ;  (2)  on  his  sense  of  Italy  as  a 
social  and  historical  unit  with  a  common  heritage  of 
civilization  and  literature  rather  than  as  a  single 
political  or  administrative  area;  and  (3)  on  the  still 
narrow  limits  of  his  conception  of  the  scope  and 
character  of  Italian  poetry. 

80 


THE     "CONVIVIO"    APOLOGETIC 

It  is  this  last  point  that  interests  our  present  in- 
quiry. The  only  verse-forms  which  Dante  allows  as 
legitimate  are  the  Canzone^  the  Ballata^  and  the 
Sonetto,  All  others  are  **  irregular  and  illegitimate." 
They  would  have  been  relegated  to  the  last  place  in 
his  treatise  had  it  ever  been  completed  ;  and  even 
there,  we  may  suppose,  would  have  been  dismissed 
with  a  brief  and  disparaging  notice.  This  is  weighty 
though  indirect  evidence  against  the  accuracy  of  the 
contemporary  tradition  (which  is  nevertheless  too 
well  authenticated  to  be  simply  brushed  aside)  that 
at  the  time  of  his  exile  Dante  had  already  drafted  the 
first  seven  Cantos  of  the  Inferno,  Can  it  be  possible 
that  this  early  draft  is  identical  with  the  recorded 
experiments  in  a  Latin  poem  on  the  theme  of  the 
Comedy  which  Dante  subsequently  abandoned  when 
his  conception  of  the  scope  of  Italian  poetry  had  so 
notably  expanded  }  It  should  be  observed,  however, 
that  he  already  admits  the  subjects  of  War  and 
Virtue,  side  by  side  with  Love,  within  the  legitimate 
range  of  vernacular  poetry.  So  there  is  already  some 
progress  towards  a  wider  conception  of  its  function. 

Of  more  direct  and  varied  interest  to  us  is  another 
treatise,  also  a  fragment,  that  occupied  Dante  during 
these  earlier  years  of  exile  (i 302-1 308).  The 
Convivio^  or  Banquet,  is  the  monument  of  what 
Dante  himself  calls  his  **  second  love  '*  in  contra- 
distinction to  his  love  of  Beatrice. 

De  Vulgari  Eloquentia  II.  iii :  8-1 1  [2],  ii :  41-83  [5-9]. 
Cf,  Appendix,  p.  152. 

81  p 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

At  the  end  of  the  Vita  Nuova  it  is  for  the  sake 
of  making  himself  more  worthy  to  commemorate 
Beatrice  that  Dante  dedicates  himself  to  study.  But 
when  in  the  Convivio  he  presents  us  with  the  record 
of  the  fruits  of  that  study  we  notice  a  subtle  but 
significant  change  in  his  phraseology,  for  he  tells 
us  that  he  took  to  study  in  hope  of  consolation 
under  his  loss,  and  no  longer  represents  it  as  a 
"preparation."  Have  we  then  in  the  Vita  Nuova 
the  register  of  a  resolve  and  in  the  Convivio  the 
record  of  a  result  which  did  not  quite  conform  to  it  ? 
So  it  would  seem  ;  for  in  the  later  work  Dante  shows 
us  very  clearly  that  whatever  it  was  that  he  sought 
in  his  ardent  application  to  study,  what  he  actually 
found  was  not  only  consolation,  but  something  more: 
a  new  mission,  namely,  a  new  inspiration,  and  even 
a  new  **  enamourment,"  in  the  ardour  of  which  his 
conception  of  a  work  to  commemorate  Beatrice  sank 
into  the  background  of  his  mind  and  was  indefinitely 
postponed  though  not  formally  abandoned.  As  to 
this  there  is  no  room  for  doubt,  for  he  tells  us  how 
when  he  sought  consolation  in  Cicero  and  Boetius, 
"  as  it  may  chance  that  a  man  goes  in  search  of  silver 
and  beyond  his  purpose  findeth  gold,  the  which 
some  hidden  cause  brings  to  view,  not  peradventure 
without  divine  command  :  so  I,  who  was  seeking  to 
console  myself,  found  not  only  a  remedy  for  my 
tears,  but  terms  of  authors  and  of  sciences  and 
of  books,  pondering  upon  which  I  judged  that 
Philosophy  was  a  thing  supreme."  And  even  more 
explicitly  he  declares,  in  relation  to  his  self-abandon- 

82 


THE     "CONVIVIO'*    APOLOGETIC 

ment  to  this  **  second  love,'*  and  its  victory  over  his 
absorption  in  memories  of  Beatrice,  that  **  a  man 
ought  not,  on  account  of  a  greater  friend,  to  forget 
the  services  received  from  a  lesser  ;  but,  if  it  be  right 
to  follow  the  one  and  leave  the  other,  the  better 
should  indeed  be  followed  but  the  other  not  aban- 
doned without  some  fitting  lamentation  ;  wherein 
the  man  gives  cause  to  the  one  he  follows  to  love 
him  the  more." 

It  is  easy  to  reconstruct  the  story  so  far.  And  the 
fragment  of  the  large  design  of  the  Convivio  that 
was  actually  executed  leaves  us  in  little  doubt  on  the 
main  point.  It  may  often  happen  that  a  task  under- 
taken in  the  first  instance  for  a  specific  purpose 
beyond  itself  presently  gains  a  hold  in  the  strength 
of  its  own  fascination,  thrusts  itself  in  front  of  that 
for  the  sake  of  which  it  was  originally  sought,  and 
becomes  an  avowed  end  instead  of  a  means.  So  it 
was  with  Dante.  He  became  enamoured  of  Philo- 
sophy for  her  own  sake  and  was  inspired  with  a 
passion  to  reveal  her  beauty  and  sing  her  praises  to 
all  who  would  hear.  As  for  Beatrice,  he  retracts  no 
word  he  has  spoken  in  the  Vita  Nuova,  He  affirms 
that  she  still  **  lives  in  heaven  with  the  angels,"  in 
that  better  life  to  which  he  himself  looks  forward 
after  this,  and  **  on  earth  with  his  soul."  But  he 
means  to  speak  of  her  no  more  in  **  this  book  " 
(the  Convivio)  on  which  he  is  now  engaged.  Did  he 
still  mean  ultimately  to  write  of  her  **  what  had 

Fita  Nuova  xliii  [xJii].  Convivio  11.  jm-,  3-40  [lii :  1-5],  xvi : 
50-58,  98-105  [xv  :  6,  12] ;  III.  i :  2  [i]. 

83 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

never  been  written  else  of  woman  "  ?  Perhaps.  But 
the  Lady  of  his  present  love  is  one  greater  than 
woman,  for  she  is  "  the  daughter  of  God,"  nay,  the 
Divine  Wisdom's  self  1 

The  splendid  eloquence  of  the  opening  passage  of 
the  Convivio  is  sufficient  evidence  that  the  main  im- 
pulse that  urged  its  author  forward  was  a  missionary 
ardour  for  bringing  the  feeding  truths  of  philosophy 
and  perhaps  yet  more  the  pure  intellectual  joy  of 
study  within  the  reach  of  busy  men  and  women  who 
had  no  opportunity  to  embrace  the  life  of  the  pro- 
fessed student.  But  combined  with  this  primary 
object  were  others  hardly  less  near  to  Dante's  heart. 
It  will  be  remembered  that  he  had  already  begun  his 
lover-like  service  of  my  Lady  Philosophy  in  a  series 
of  Canzoni^  or  Odes,  directly  or  indirectly  conse- 
crated to  her  ;  and  so  it  seemed  natural  enough,  not 
only  to  Dante  but  to  his  contemporaries  also  (for 
not  one  of  them  hints  that  there  was  anything  strange 
about  it),  that  his  encyclopaedia  of  popular  science  and 
theology  should  take  the  shape  of  a  commentary  or 
exposition  based  on  the  Odes  which  had  already 
made  him  famous  throughout  Italy  as  a  poet.  The 
idea  was,  of  course,  suggested  by  the  fact  that  some 
of  the  Odes  in  question  were  in  truth  a  glorification 
of  Philosophy,  or  of  her  "  friends,"  and  would 
naturally  take  their  place  in  the  elaborated  expres- 
sion of  his  devotion  to  her  service.    But  others,  as 

Convivio  I.  I '.  Iii-ii5[i6];  II.  ii :  6-8  [i],  ix  :  132-137, 
49-55  [viii :  16,  7],  liii :  71  [xii :  9];  III.  liv :  51-60  [6  /f.] 
Cf.  p.  96  s^, 

84 


THE     "CONVIVIO"    APOLOGETIC 

we  have  seen,  were  quite  alien  in  their  origin  from 
the  praise  of  Philosophy.  To  represent  them  also  as 
hymns  to  Philosophy,  and  so  to  bring  them  into  rela- 
tion with  the  scheme,  would  require  amazing  tours 
de  force  of  allegorical  interpretation,  such  as  could 
only  have  been  contemplated  in  an  age  accustomed 
to  all  manner  of  fantastic  feats  in  this  direction. 
But  Dante's  age  was  such.  Not  only  the  Scriptures 
and  the  works  of  the  Latin  poets,  but  the  works  of 
God  and  Nature  too,  and  even  the  lives  or  actions  of 
men,  might  be  taken  to  owe  their  significance  not 
to  what  they  were,  but  to  what  they  meant  as 
symbolical  expressions  of  the  divine  purpose.  More- 
over, it  did  not  at  all  follow  that  the  poets  or  heroes 
themselves  were  always  conscious  of  the  inner 
meaning  of  their  utterances  or  actions.  Virgil,  for 
instance,  did  not  know  that  he  was  prophesying  of 
Christ  in  his  Fourth  Eclogue,  nor,  I  suppose,  did 
Jacob's  wives,  Leah  and  Rachel,  know  that  they 
were  types  of  Martha  and  Mary  to  come,  and  that 
they  represented  the  Practical  and  the  Contemplative 
life  respectively.  Nor  was  consistency  demanded  of 
the  allegorist.  The  same  symbol  might  stand  for 
different  or  opposite  things  in  different  connections, 
perhaps  might  even  bear  contradictory  significances 
m  the  same  passage  according  to  the  scheme  of  inter- 
pretation that  was  being  applied  to  it  at  the  moment. 
Dante  had  already  explained  in  the  Vita  Nuova 
that  passages  in  his  poems  which  he  meant  to  be 
taken  as  applying  to  another  lady  when  he  wrote 
them  he  wishes  to  be  understood  now  as  applying 

85 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

to  Beatrice.  Might  not  the  process  be  reversed  ? 
Might  not  a  poem  which  was  originally  written  in 
connection  with  Dante*s  first  love  be  interpreted  in 
relation  to  the  second  ?  By  such  shifts  as  this  the 
whole  body  of  the  Canzoni  of  which  he  desired  to 
speak  might  be  included  in  his  work.  This  form  of 
presentation,  besides  maintaining  continuity  (by 
linking  his  past  to  his  future  tribute  to  my  Lady 
Philosophy),  and  besides  following  the  model  of  the 
Vita  Nuova  (by  making  a  prose  framework  for  a 
collection  of  poems),  would  have  the  additional 
advantage  of  giving  him  a  good  excuse  for  an  at- 
tempt which  he  longed  to  make  on  its  own  merits — 
the  attempt,  namely,  to  extend  the  range  and  raise 
the  dignity  of  Italian  Prose  as  he  had  already  helped 
to  raise  Italian  Verse. 

His  cyclopaedia  must  be  written  in  the  vernacular 
for  many  good  reasons,  but,  if  it  was  to  aim  at  being 
at  once  severe  in  its  argument  and  of  cultured  beauty 
in  its  form,  prejudice  would  be  against  the  verna- 
cular. Some  excuse  for  this  new  advance,  to  protect 
the  underlying  reasons  for  it,  would  be  welcome  ; 
and  if  the  work  was  presented  /is  a  commentary 
on  an  Italian  text  the  excuse  might  be  found  in  the 
congruity  between  the  requirements  of  the  "  master  '* 
text  and  the  powers  of  the  "  servant  "  commentary. 
Now,  some  of  Dante's  poems,  already  famous,  fell 
in  quite  easily  with  his  central  purpose  in  writing 
the  Convivio,  Such  were  the  genuinely  philosophical 
and  quasi-philosophical  Odes,  including  the  noble 
Cf.  p.  90.    Convivio  I.  x  :  74-102  [11-13],  xii :   1-17  [i  Jf.]. 

86 


the"convivio"    apologetic 

poem  (one  of  the  few  that  we  may  be  sure  were 
written  during  his  exile)  that  begins  : 

Tre  donne  intomo  al  cor  mi  son  venute, 

which  would  give  him  occasion  to  treat  of  Justice 
and  incidentally  to  deliver  his  own  apologia  for  his 
political  life  and  to  protest  against  his  unjust  exile. 

But  there  were  also  Odes — and  amongst  them 
those  that  threatened  to  be  the  most  recalcitrant 
to  the  allegorical  treatment — which  Dante  had  special 
reasons  for  bringing  under  it,  because  he  wished  to 
remove  the  impression  they  gave  (or,  at  least,  to 
dissociate  himself  from  it)  when  taken  in  their 
natural  and  obvious  sense.  This  is  the  next  point 
that  we  must  examine. 

In  the  introductory  Treatise  of  the  Convivio 
Dante  apologizes  on  two  grounds  for  speaking  of 
himself.  One  of  them  is  that  it  is  legitimate  for  a 
man  to  speak  of  himself  if  thereby  he  can  clear  him- 
self **  of  some  great  disgrace."  And  he  goes  on  to 
say,  "  I  myself  fear  the  disgrace  of  having  succumbed 
to  so  great  a  passion  as  he  who  reads  the  aforenamed 
Odes  must  conceive  to  have  had  mastery  over  me. 
Which  disgrace  is  entirely  quenched  by  this  present 
discourse  concerning  myself,  which  shows  that  not 
passion,  but  virtue,  was  the  moving  cause.**  Now, 
amongst  the  fourteen  Odes  that  seem  to  have  been 
embraced  in  the  scheme  of  the  Convivio  those  that 
belong  to  the  Pietra  group  are  the  only  ones  which 
even  the  most  sensitive  conscience  could  regard  as 
Convivio  IV.  xivii :  100-103  [11];   I.  ii :  1 14-130  [15-17]. 

87 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

reflecting  disgrace  upon  their  author.  And  since  we 
have  sufficiently  clear  indications  that  these  parti- 
cular Odes  were  actually  to  find  a  place  in  the  work 
we  may  take  it  as  certain  that  the  whole  elaborate 
scheme  of  a  twofold  interpretation,  literal  and  alle- 
gorical, which  is  laid  down  in  the  second  Treatise  of 
the  Convivio^  was  primarily  designed  for  application 
to  them,  and  is  only  consequentially  attempted,  or  is 
even  abandoned,  in  other  cases. 

Thus  the  second  Treatise,  commenting  on  the 
Ode 

Voi  che  intendendo  il  terzo  ciel  movete, 

is,  as  we  shall  see,  an  unsuccessful  attempt  to  explain 
away  the  natural  and  very  innocent  meaning  of  the 
poem  and  to  force  an  allegorical  interpretation  upon 
it.  In  the  next  commentary,  contained  in  the  third 
Treatise,  the  poem  to  be  dealt  with. 

Amor  che  nella  mente  mi  raggiona, 

was  really  written  in  praise  of  Philosophy,  and 
accordingly  the  case  is  here  reversed  and  extreme 
difficulty  arises  in  keeping  up  any  semblance  of  a 
literal  interpretation  as  distinct  from  the  allegory. 
The  fourth  and  last  Treatise,  commenting  on  the  Ode 
Le  dolci  rime  d'amor  ch'io  solea, 

deals  with  the  nature  of  true  Nobility,  and  does  not 
lend  itself  in  any  kind  of  way  to  the  twofold  inter- 

Convivio  IV.  xxvi :  64-70  [8].  Cf.  "  Cosl  nel  mio  parlar  voglio 
esser  aspro,"  line  36.  (The  mention  of  Dido  is  the  more  significant 
as  it  is  the  only  instance  of  a  proper  name  occurring  in  a  Canzone  of 
Dante's.)    Convwio  II.  ii :   52-57  [6], 

88 


THE     "CONVIVIO" APOLOGETIC 

pretation.  Here  the  author  is  obliged  frankly  to 
abandon  his  method.  Fortunately  the  Pietra  poems 
were  never  reached  ;  but  anyone  who  reads  them 
will  agree  that  the  attempt  to  allegorize  the  finest  of 
them  would  have  proved  still  more  unconvincing 
than  it  is  in  the  case  of  the  Canzone 

Voi  che  intendendo  il  terzo  del  movcte, 

commented  on  in  the  second  Treatise,  to  an  examina- 
tion of  which  we  must  now  turn. 

This  beautiful  and  touching  poem  rose  out  of  the 
episode  of  the  Gentle  Lady  in  whose  sympathy 
Dante  had  found  a  brief  solace  in  the  hour  of  his 
deepest  affliction.  Was  she  not  (we  have  already 
supposed  Dante  might  ask  himself)  a  kind  of  fore- 
shadowing or  anti-type  of  the  more  exalted  Lady 
in  whom  he  was  indeed  to  find  comfort,  not  for 
"  certain  days  **  only,  but  through  many  a  year  of 
trouble  and  of  exile  ?  Might  not  the  song  once 
sung  to  her  in  the  moment  of  her  passing  triumph  be 
fitly  adopted  as  a  sister  by  the  philosophic  Canzoni  ? 
And  might  not  the  transient  events  that  gave  rise 
to  it  be  read  and  explained  in  the  light  of  their  after- 
revealed  significance  ? 

There  might  be  some  subjective  truth  in  such  a  re- 
reading of  the  past.  But  the  objective  record  stub- 
bornly opposed  itself  to  any  attempt  to  show  that  the 
meaning  now  imported  into  the  poem  was  that  which 
it  was  originally  intended  to  convey,  or  even  cryptic- 
ally to  hint  at.  In  the  Vita  Nuova  Dante  not  only 
Convivio  IV.  i :  83-92  [10  /f .]. 

89 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

confesses  to  love-guiles,  involving  intentional  mystifi- 
cation, but  also  declares  that  certain  passages  in  his 
poems  were  intended  to  be  understood  one  way 
when  they  were  written,  but  are  to  be  understood 
now,  and  were  secretly  meant  from  the  first,  in  an- 
other way.  In  these  cases  he  perhaps  leaves  us  in 
doubt  which  of  the  two  meanings  was  really  his  when 
he  wrote  the  lines  in  question.  But  there  is  no  room 
even  for  doubt  in  the  case  of  the  poem  we  are  now 
considering.  For  not  only  is  the  allegorical  meaning 
forced  and  unnatural,  but  the  objective  facts  give  a 
conclusive  verdict  against  it. 

In  the  Vita  Nuova  the  Gentle  Lady  appears  when 
**  a  certain  space  "  has  elapsed  since  the  first  anni- 
versary of  Beatrice's  death  and  tries  the  poet's 
constancy  for  "  certain  days,"  during  which  she 
enjoys  a  brief  triumph.  Then  the  memory  of  Beatrice 
victoriously  reasserts  itself.  Dante's  thought  of  the 
other  lady  was,  he  declares,  "  most  base  "  in  itself 
and  "  gentle  "  only  in  so  far  as  its  object  was  a 
**  Gentle  Lady."  He  "  repents  grievously  "  of  it, 
and  with  his  "  whole  heart  shame-laden  "  turns  back 
to  Beatrice.   In  the  still  extant  sonnet, 

Parole  mie,  che  per  lo  mondo  siete 

Fita  Nuovay.  22-32  [3,  4],  vi :  1-12  [i  /f.].  Cf.  Sonnet  xxxii 
[Rim.  Hi] :  Guidoy  i  vorrei  che  tu  e  Lapo  ed  to,  in  which  lines  9,  10 
should  read  : 

E  monna  Vanna  e  monna  Lagia  poi 
con  quella  ch'  e  sul  numer  de  le  trenta, 

as  in  the  new  0/»^r<r  dt  Z)tf/?//f  (Firenze,  192 1);  2X^0  Vita  Nuova 
vii~x  (especially  vii :  44-47  [7]),  viii :  70-72  [12]. 

90 


THE     "CONVIVIO" APOLOGETIC 

(not  included  in  the  Vita  Nuova)^  he  expressly  de- 
clares that  this  very  poem  Voi  che  intendendo^  etc., 
was  addressed  to  the  Lady  in  whom  his  heart  **  went 
astray,"  and  that  no  members  of  the  group  to  which 
it  belongs  are  any  longer  to  abide  with  her,  **  for 
Love  is  not  there." 

In  the  Convivio  the  Lady  of  the  second  love  first 
appears  to  him  considerably  more  than  three  years 
after  Beatrice's  death.  It  is  some  thirty  months  after 
this  before  he  had  sufficiently  overcome  the  first 
difficulties  of  study  to  feel  the  full  power  of  his 
enamourment.  Some  fifteen  years,  say,  after 
Beatrice's  death,  when  he  writes  the  Convivio^  the 
Second  Love  still  holds  him  in  its  full  strength,  and 
he  means  to  speak  of  Beatrice  no  more  in  the  work 
that  is  devoted  to  its  expression.  Instead  of  being 
ashamed  of  it  he  glories  in  it  as  in  the^better  treasure 
he  has  now  found. 

And  again,  in  commenting  on  one  of  the  poems 
addressed  to  the  Gentle  Lady  in  the  Vita  Nuova^  he 
had  expressly  said  that  "  heart  "  was  to  be  taken  to 
mean  **  appetite  "  as  opposed  to  reason.  Now,  the 
careful  reader  may  note  that  if  this  meaning  were 
assigned  to  the  word  in  the  present  connection  it 
would  make  the  poem  harmonize  completely  with 

Fita  Nuova  xxiv  :  i-6,  xxivi :  1-13  [xxxiv  :  i,  xxxv  :  i  /f.], 
xl :  1-23  [xxxix  :  1-3],  xxxix  :  28-32  [xxxviii :  4].  Convivio  II. 
ii :  I  sqq.  [for  the  "  period  "  of  Venus  referred  to  vide  Lu bin's 
Dante  e  gii  astronomi  Itaiiani  (Trieste,  1895).  Cf.  "Temple 
Clawics  "  ConviviOy  p.  433],  Convivio  II.  xiii :  49-52  [xii :  7], 
ix  :  49-55  [viii :  7],  and  (as  already  cited)  xvi :  50  sqq.  [xv  :  6]. 

91 


THE     MINOR      WORKS 

the  literal  story  as  told  and  regarded  in  the  Vita 
Nuova^  but  would  ruin  the  whole  allegorical  interpre- 
tation offered  in  the  Convivio  \  and  it  is  evidently 
with  this  in  his  mind  that  Dante  now  warns  his 
readers  against  taking  the  word  in  this  poem  to 
mean  "  any  special  part  of  the  soul  or  body,"  and 
bids  them  understand  it  simply  as  the  inner  man. 
Surely  all  this  amounts  to  a  scarcely  veiled  acknow- 
ledgement that  we  are  to  take  the  assertion  as  to  the 
meaning  of  the  poem  rather  as  defining  his  present 
attitude  of  mind  than  as  faithfully  interpreting  its 
original  meaning.  Can  Dante  really  have  expected 
or,  in  spite  of  his  protestations,  intended  that  they 
should  be  understood  in  any  other  way  ? 

It  is  now  perhaps  sufficiently  clear  that  the 
allegorizing  of  this  particular  poem  can  hardly  have 
been  undertaken  on  its  own  merits,  and  that  it  is  but 
a  part  of  a  general  scheme  which  was  conceived  with 
special  relation  to  the  Pietra  group  of  poems,  from 
the  implications  of  which  Dante  was  seriously 
anxious  to  dissociate  himself. 

As  to  these  magnificent  poems  themselves  I  can- 
not believe  that  if  they  had  been  written  by  any  other 
poet  they  would  have  been  felt  by  Dante  to  throw 
"  disgrace "  upon  their  author,  or  would  have 
alienated  his  heart  from  him.  But  it  is  equally  certain 
that  the  passion  which  breathes  through  them  would 

Fita  Nuova  xxxix  :  33-37,  55  xf.  [ixxviii :  5,  7].  Convivio  II. 
vii  :  17-22  [vi  :  2].  As  to  the  allegory,  vide  passages  already 
cited:  ConvivioW.Kw  52-57  [6];  I.  ii :  1 14-123  [15,16].  Cf. 
Purgatorio  xxxi :  34-36. 

92 


THE     "CONVIVIO" APOLOGETIC 

have  called  for  the  cancelling  penitence  of  Purgatory 
and  was  alien  from  the  note  of  the  Convivio, 

But,  whatever  importance  may  be  attached  to  this 
attempt  to  find  in  the  Convivio  the  half-obliterated 
traces  of  the  false  paths  on  which  Dante  declares  in 
the  Purgatorio^  with  agonized  self-reproaches,  that 
he  had  trodden  since  the  days  of  the  Vita  Nuova^ 
our  estimate  of  his  actual  interests,  convictions,  and 
enthusiasms  when  writing  the  Convivio  itself  is  quite 
independent  of  this  speculative  element.  As  a 
veritable  document  of  the  stage  in  Dante's  mental 
history  at  which  it  was  composed — as  distinct  from  a 
somewhat  blurred  record  of  experiences  that  had 
preceded  it — it  presents  its  own  problems,  the  solu- 
tion of  which  is  unaffected  by  the  success  or  failure  of 
the  interpretation  that  has  now  been  given  of  some 
of  its  incidental  features.  Bearing  this  in  mind,  and 
welcoming  the  relief  of  treading  on  firmer  ground 
and  finding  less  uneasy  footing,  we  may  now  turn  to 
these  fresh  problems. 


IV.    THE   "convivio'*    IN    ITS    POSITIVE 
CONTENT 

As  to  the  sincerity  and  the  exalted  character  of 
Dante's  second  enamourment  there  can  be  no  doubt, 
and  we  must  now  turn  to  the  prose  text  of  the 
Convivio  in  order  to  form  a  clearer  conception  of  its 
significance.  In  doing  so  we  must  look  both  back- 
ward and  forward — to  the  Vita  Nuova  and  to  the 
Comedy.    Dante's  first  love,   the  Beatrice  of  the 

93 


THE      MINOR     WORKS 

Vita  Nuova^  is  the  impersonation  of  goodness, 
beauty,  and  truth.  His  second  love,  my  Lady 
Philosophy,  impersonates  nothing,  for  she  is  not  a 
person  at  all,  but  only  a  personification,  which  may 
be,  and  in  this  case  is,  a  very  different  thing.  A 
personification  is  primarily  a  figure  of  speech  or  of 
rhetoric,  and  it  does  not  necessarily  demand  any 
greater  effort  of  the  imagination  or  expenditure  of 
feeling  than  is  involved  in  an  initial  letter  or  a  vocative 
case.  The  object  of  Dante's  second  love  does  indeed 
represent  more,  and  far  more,  than  this,  for  she 
inspires  a  genuine  passion  of  devotion.  But  she 
remains  a  personification,  and  never  becomes  a  per- 
son. Even  the  evanescent  personality  which  she 
borrows  from  her  (fictitious,  as  we  have  seen)  identi- 
fication with  the  Gentle  Lady  of  the  Pita  Nuova  and 
the  Canzone  is  virtually  repudiated  in  the  Convivio, 
This  lack  of  personality  becomes  all  the  clearer  if  we 
compare  her  with  impersonations  of  human  and  divine 
wisdom  in  the  Virgil  and  the  Beatrice  of  the  Comedy. 
As  to  the  vividness  of  Virgil's  personality  there 
can  be  no  difference  of  feeling.  The  very  passages 
that  are  framed  to  fit  his  allegorical  significance  most 
closely  are  sometimes  the  most  poignant  in  the  well- 
nigh  intolerable  pressure  of  their  appeal  on  behalf 
of  the  Exile  from  heaven — as,  for  instance,  in  his 
words  to  Dante  : 

For  as  I  lived  a  rebel  to  His  sway, 
The  Emperor,  Who  Governeth  On  High, 
Doth  all  approach  through  me  unto  His  Courts  deny 

(Musgrave), 

94 


THE    "CONVIVIO"     DIDACTIC 

or  to  Statius:  **  May  the  true  court  which  bindeth  me 
in  eternal  exile  bring  thee  in  peace  to  the  council  of 
the  blessed.'*  Or  where  Statius  tells  him,  **  'Twas 
thou  didst  light  my  way  to  God.  Thou  didst  as  he 
who,  stepping  through  the  night,  beareth  the  light 
behind  him,  to  himself  of  no  avail,  but  making  clear 
the  path  to  them  that  follow."  Or  in  the  last  scene, 
when  he  vanishes  before  the  presence  of  Beatrice. 

Beatrice  is  generally  less  vividly  felt  by  the  reader 
as  a  personality  than  Virgil  is.  Nor  is  the  fusion  of 
the  biographical  and  the  allegorical  elements  that 
combine  in  her  portrayal  so  complete  as  in  his  case. 
But  at  least  there  can  be  no  doubt  of  the  sense  of 
her  personality  in  Dante's  own  mind,  and  her 
allegorical  significance  even  at  its  highest  never 
empties  her  of  individuality.  Thus,  while  nothing 
but  the  thought  that  she  represents  Revelation 
could  make  it  natural,  or  even  tolerable,  to  introduce 
her  as  riding  in  a  chariot  (the  Church)  drawn  by 
Christ  himself  in  the  form  of  a  griffon  ;  yet  it  is  in 
this  very  scene  that  her  personal  appeal  to  Dante 
breaks  through  all  allegorical  swathmgs,  and  every 
unsophisticated  reader  feels  that  two  human  per- 
sonalities stand  face  to  face. 

But  in  the  Convivio  Philosophy  has  no  personality. 
The  lady  of  the  Ode- 
Amor  che  nclla  mentc  mi  raggiona, 
or  the  Ballade — 

Voi  chi  sapete  raggionar  d'  amore, 

Infemo'w  124-126.  Purgtttorio  x:u\  16-18,  xxii :  67-69, 
"*  ••  43-S4 

95 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

may  smile  or  frown  as  she  will,  but  we  never  see 
either  smile  or  frown  pass  over  a  human  countenance 
The  Odes  that  were  truly  addressed  to  Philosophy 
are  neither  allegorical  nor  literal  in  any  vital  sense  ; 
for  they  are  merely  figurative,  and  Augustine  has 
taught  us  to  distinguish  between  figure  and  allegory. 
Thus,  when  Scripture  speaks  of  the  divine  power  as 
**  the  arm  of  God  "  the  phrase  does  not  even  literally 
refer  to  any  bodily  organ.  It  is  a  figure  for  "  effec- 
tive power,"  and  that  is  what  it  directly  suggests. 
And  so  it  is  with  the  smile  and  frown  of  the  Lady 
of  Dante's  second  love.  They  are  just  as  purely 
figurative  as  the  smile  on  the  face  of  Wordsworth's 
"  Duty.'' 

Indeed,  this  could  not  be  otherwise,  for  no  human 
personality,  not  even  that  of  a  Beatrice,  could  bear 
the  strain  of  intimate  assimilation  to  the  exalted  Lady 
of  the  Convivio,  It  is  only  by  virtue  of  vagueness  and 
indefiniteness  of  outline  that  she  can  cover  the  whole 
range  of  the  poet's  imperfectly  co-ordinated  beliefs 
and  feelings. 

For  since  Dante  is  a  devout  Christian  believer  and 
the  Lady  of  his  second  love  is  no  other  than  Wisdom 
herself,  it  follows  that  she  is  that  very  Wisdom  cele- 
brated in  the  Book  of  Proverbs  and  in  the  Apocry- 
phal Book  of  Wisdom.  Thus,  it  is  of  her  that  it  was 
written  "  From  the  beginning,  before  the  ages,  was 
I  created."  She  is  "  The  glow  of  the  Eternal  Light, 
the  spotless  mirror  of  the  majesty  of  God."  She  is 
**  The  spouse  of  the  Emperor  of  Heaven  .  .  .  and 
not  his  spouse  only,  but  his  sister  and  his  beloved 

96    . 


THE     "CONVIVIO"     DIDACTIC 

daughter.**  It  was  with  her  that  God  began  the 
universe  and,  in  particular,  the  movement  of  the 
heavens.  The  angels  gaze  upon  her  continuously 
though  we  mortals  can  hold  but  intermittent  converse 
with  her.  And  finally  (since  the  **  Wisdom  *'  of  Pro- 
verbs is  no  other  than  the  "  Word  **  of  the  proem  of  S. 
John's  Gospel),  it  was  she  that  so  loved  the  world  that 
she  came  in  our  likeness  to  direct  our  course  aright. 

The  Beatrice  of  the  Comedy,  in  her  "  allegorical  ** 
capacity  of  Revelation,  may  be  drawn  by  Christ 
himself  in  the  chariot  of  the  Church,  may  be  sur- 
rounded by  prophets  and  evangelists  and  angels, 
may  have  been  attended  by  the  moral  and  theological 
virtues  "  before  she  descended  to  earth,**  but  she 
could  not  have  been  identified  even  allegorically 
with  the  Second  Person  of  the  Trinity  ;  and,  as  we 
have  seen,  it  is  in  the  very  passage  in  which  her 
allegorical  character  reaches  its  highest  point  of 
exaltation  that  our  sense  of  her  human  personality 
becomes  most  vivid. 

Beatrice,  then,  even  in  the  Comedy,  always  re- 
mains a  personality.  The  Lady  of  Dante*s  second 
love  neither  is  nor  can  be  anything  more  than  a 
personification.  But  what  does  she  personify  ? 

To  answer  this  question  fully  we  must  consult  not 

Cofwivio  111.  liv  :  58-64  [7],  xv  :  54 /f.  [5],  xii :  11 5-1 18 
[14],  XV  :  157-159  [15].  »»»••  46-55*  70-75  [5»  7],  XV  :  180- 
'84  [17].  Cf.  II.  and  III.  passim.  It  must  be  a  strong  faith  in 
their  allegorizing  theory  that  has  enabled  some  commentators  to 
find  t  reference  to  this  august  Lady  in  the  "pargoletta,  o  altra 
vanitA  "  of  Purgatorio  xxxi :   59  /f . 

97  o 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

only  the  selected  passages  in  which  she  is  approxi- 
mated to,  or  identified  with,  the  "  Word  "  that  was 
made  flesh,  but  the  great  body  of  the  prose  of  the 
Convivio,  We  shall  there  find  that  the  Philosophy 
of  whom'  Dante  is  enamoured  includes  not  only 
theology,  but  all  the  humbler  branches  of  study, 
down  to  arithmetic,  logic,  and  grammar  (that  is  to 
say,  the  Latin  language  and  literature).  She  is,  in 
short,  the  comprehensive  and  necessarily  vague  and 
many-coloured  symbol  of  all  wisdom,  human  and 
divine;  and  no  one  who  neglects  or  depreciates  any 
branch  of  knowledge  is  worthy  to  be  regarded  as  her 
lover.  The  differentiation,  then,  between  secular  and 
sacred  learning  that  is  so  prominent  in  the  sym- 
bolism of  the  Comedy  finds  no  expression  at  all  in 
that  of  the  Convivio, 

It  is  true,  as  we  shall  see,  that  the  fact  and  the 
importance  of  Revelation  as  part,  and  that  the 
highest  part,  of  Wisdom  are  already  recognized  in  the 
Convivio  ;  but  Beatrice  is  not  yet  brought  into  any 
special  relation  with  it,  as  she  is  in  the  Comedy. 
On  the  contrary,  in  the  conflict  between  the  new 
love  and  the  old,  Beatrice  is  not  a  symbol  of  Revela- 
tion or  of  anything  else.  She  is  just  the  Florentine 
maiden  who  lives  in  heaven  with  the  angels  and  in 
Dante's  memory  on  earth.  The  great  scheme  of 
study  which  was  undertaken  for  her  glorification  has 
now  passed,  in  its  own  strength,  out  of  her  domain. 
Her  victorious  rival,  under  whose  inspiration  Dante 
enters  on  the  high  emprise  of  the  Convivio^  is  the 
Convivio  II.  xiv,  xv  ;  III.  xi :  94-129  [9-12]. 

98 


THE     "CONVIVIO"     DIDACTIC 

collective  symbol  of  Wisdom  under  all  her  aspects, 
including  the  revealed  truths  of  Theology. 

It  is  to  a  due  appreciation  of  these  facts  that  we 
must  look  for  a  solution  of  the  problem  that  has  so 
long  exercised  the  minds  of  Dantists  as  to  the  exact 
place  and  meaning  that  must  be  assigned  to  the 
Convivio  in  relation  to  Dante's  other  works  and  to 
his  mental  and  spiritual  history  in  general. 

The  conception  of  personified  Wisdom  did  not 
originate  with  Dante.  Tradition  assigned  to  Solo- 
mon all  the  most  important  utterances  of  the  Hebrew 
sages.  And  so  the  Wisdom  that  is  so  splendidly 
personified  in  the  Book  of  Proverbs  and  in  the 
Wisdom  of  Solomon  might  be  regarded  as  at  one 
moment  inspiring  her  royal  pupil  with  homely 
proverbial  truths,  at  another  teaching  him  to  speak 
"  of  trees  from  the  cedar  which  is  in  Lebanon  even 
unto  the  hyssop  that  springeth  out  of  the  wall,"  or 
**  of  beasts  and  of  fowls  and  of  creeping  things  and 
of  fishes,'*  and  at  yet  another  inviting  him  to  hold 
intercourse  with  her  because  she  was  "  privy  to  the 
mysteries  of  the  knowledge  of  God." 

The  more  immediate  source  of  Dante's  concep- 
tion of  personified  Philosophy,  however,  is  to  be 
found  not  so  much  in  the  Old  Testament  as  in  one 
of  the  very  books  by  which,  as  he  tells  us,  he  sought 
consolation   after   the   death   of  Beatrice.     For   to 

Proverbs  viii :  i — ^ix  :  6.  i  Kings  iv  :  33.  Wisdom  of  Solomon 
viii  :  4.  [In  the  Vulgate,  however,  somewhat  less  emphatically 
than  in  the  Greek  and  the  A.V.,  doctrix  enim  €st  discipUnet  Dei, 

Convivio  II.  xiii :   14-16  [xii :  2]. 

99 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

Boetius  in  his  captivity  and  despondence  Philosophy 
appeared  in  person  to  minister  consolation.  Her 
*'  undivided  robe,"  representing  the  practical  and 
theoretic  sciences  in  their  continuous  unity,  was 
woven  by  her  own  hands  and  "  at  one  moment  she 
confined  herself  within  the  wonted  stature  of  a 
mortal  and  at  another  her  towering  height  seemed  to 
strike  against  heaven,  nay,  when  she  fully  raised  her 
head  she  even  pierced  into  heaven  itself  and  drew  up 
the  gaze  of  man  in  the  vain  attempt  to  follow."^ 

This  figure  of  the  Boetian  Wisdom  with  cloud- 
girt  brow  was  known  to  mediaeval  art,  and  the  con- 
ception would  be  familiar  to  Dante's  readers.  But 
the  interesting  point  is  that,  at  bottom,  it  is  not  a 
specifically  Christian  but  a  characteristically  Ethnic 
conception.  It  is  important  to  realize  this,  and  to  do 
so  we  must  dwell  for  a  moment  upon  the  interesting 
personality  of  Boetius  himself. 

The  writings  of  Boetius  (475-525  A.D.)long  pre- 
sented a  curious  problem  to  the  historians  and 
critics.  His  great  prison  book,  the  Consolatio 
Philosophic^  remains  throughout  on  the  plane  of 
Ethnic  philosophy  and  religion.  There  is  nothing  in 

1  Boetius:  Consolatio  Philosophic,  Lib.  I,  Prosa  i.  The  transla- 
tion in  the  text  is  free.  The  original  runs :  "  Nam  nunc  quidem  ad 
communem  sese  hominum  mensuram  cohibebat,  nunc  vero  pulsare 
caelum  summi  verticis  cacumine  videbatur  :  quae  cum  caput  altius 
eitulisset,  ipsum  etiam  caelum  penetrabat,  respicientiumque  homi- 
num frustrabatur  intuitum."  Her  robes  were  "  indissolubili  materia 
perfectae,"  and  the  Delphin  editor,  I  think  rightly,  explains  in- 
dissolubilis  as  individua,  which  reminds  us  of  the  seamless  garment 
in  John  lix  :  23. 

100 


THE     "CONVIVIO"     DIDACTIC 

it  to  indicate  that  the  author  is  a  Christian.  There  is 
no  reference  to  the  Christian  Scriptures,  no  recogni- 
tion of  Revelation  as  distinct  from  philosophic 
reasoning,  no  trace  of  any  specific  Christian  doctrine 
or  article  of  faith,  and  no  appeal  to  rewards  or 
punishments  in  a  future  life.  It  is  throughout  a 
noble  plea  for  the  thesis  that  if  we  take  life  as  we 
find  it  and  rightly  weigh  its  values  we  shall  see  that 
the  good  man  is  never  to  be  pitied  and  the  bad  man 
never  to  be  envied.  It  was  in  these  thoughts  that 
Boetius  found  consolation  in  his  hour  of  need. 

But,  nevertheless,  several  theological  tracts  on  the 
doctrine  of  the  Trinity  and  on  the  two  natures  in 
the  person  of  Christ  are  extant  bearing  his  name  ; 
and  on  the  strength  of  them  he  received  unsuspecting 
hospitality  amongst  the  Christians  for  many  cen- 
turies. His  teaching  was  a  counterpoise,  assimilated 
without  any  sense  of  opposition,  to  excessive 
scripturalism  of  argument  and  other-worldliness  of 
appeal,  and  as  such  had  undoubted  spiritual  value. 
He  has  been  happily  described  as  "  the  light  of 
a  thousand  years,"  and  it  has  been  said  that  from 
his  own  day  to  the  time  of  the  Renaissance  there  was 
probably  no  book  outside  the  canon  that  administered 
strength  and  consolation  to  so  many  Christian  souls. 

No  wonder  that  in  the  more  critical  days  that 
followed  the  revival  of  letters  the  authenticity  of  the 
theological  treatises  was  assailed  and,  indeed,  found 
few  competent  defenders.  On  the  other  hand,  more 
recent  researches  have  placed  the  Boetian  authorship 
of  these  essays  beyond  the  reach  of  cavil.    It  had 

lOI 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

always  been  well  known  that  Boetius  was  the  intimate 
friend  and  associate  of  the  leading  Christian  scholars 
of  his  day,  and  it  now  seems  obvious  that  whereas  he 
accepted  Christianity  sincerely  and  unquestioningly, 
yet  his  active  interests  were  those  of  a  secular  or  de- 
tached student.  He  wrote  standard  treatises  on 
arithmetic  and  music,  for  instance,  translated  logical 
treatises  of  Aristotle,  and  intended  to  carry  out  a  vast 
scheme  of  work  on  similar  lines.  He  was  an  ac- 
complished Platonist,  too  ;  and  thus  it  was  with  the 
great  Ethnic  thinkers,  saints,  and  seers  that  he  spent 
his  days,  from  them  that  he  drew  his  spiritual 
nourishment,  and  upon  their  support  that  he  fell 
back  in  his  misfortunes.  But  he  was  quite  willing, 
we  may  suppose,  to  lend  a  hand  to  his  ecclesiastical 
friends  by  throwing  into  "elegant  "philosophical  form 
the  more  recondite  articles  of  the  creed  which  he  and 
they  alike  professed.^  And  the  character  of  the  tracts 
themselves  is  in  full  harmony  with  this  hypothesis. 

I  have  dwelt  at  length  on  the  position  of  Boetius 
because  it  is  so  singularly  helpful  to  us  in  appreciat- 
ing that  of  Dante  at  the  Convivio  stage  of  his  evolu- 
tion. The  philosophy  personified  in  the  Consolatio 
covers  the  whole  system  of  studies  of  which  Dante 

^  On  Boetius  vide  "  Temple  Classics "  Paradiso  note  on  x  :  1 24- 
l29,Wicksteed's  Reactions  between  Dogma  and  Philosophy  (London, 
1920),  pp.  42-45,  89  sqq.,  and  (for  the  authenticity  of  the  Theo- 
logical tracts)  Anecdoton  Holderi,  Hermann  Usener  (Leipzig,  1 877). 
Even  in  the  Middle  Ages  some  few  readers  noted  the  unorthodox  or 
non-Christian  tone  of  the  Consolatio.  Vide  Nietzsch  :  Das  System 
des  Boethius  (Berlin,  1 860),  pp.  27  sqq.,  and  Migne :  Pat.  Lat.  liiv : 
col.  1239  Jff. 

102 


THE     "CONVIVIo''     DIDACTIC 

was  at  this  time  really  enamoured  ;  but  she  does  not 
cover  all  he  believed.  Like  Boetius,  only  more  so, 
he  accepted  and  reverenced  as  true  the  whole  scheme 
of  Christian  doctrines,  though  his  mind  was  not 
habitually  engaged  on  it  for  its  own  sake.  Specific- 
ally Christian  subjects  of  speculation  had  not  yet 
wound  themselves  into  his  inmost  affections.  They 
had  made  as  yet  no  large  contribution  to  the  gathered 
stores  of  his  mind,  nor  did  they  spontaneously  pre- 
sent him  with  the  examples  and  illustrations  he 
needed  in  his  discourse.  But  on  the  other  hand  they 
had  already  fired  his  imagination  as  they  never  did 
that  of  Boetius.  And  therefore  the  Lady  of  his  second 
love  is  constantly  addressed  in  terms  and  endowed 
with  attributes  alien  to  the  Philosophia  Consolatrix  of 
Boetius,  on  which  she  is  modelled.  To  borrow  the 
imagery  of  the  Gospels,  Dante's  "  Philosophy,"  in 
the  Convivio^  has  a  net  which  will  hold  all  the  great 
fishes  of  Boetius  without  breaking,  but  we  see  that 
the  yet  greater  draft  of  fishes  which  this  same  net  is 
already  opening  itself  to  receive  will  inevitably  burst 
it  in  the  end. 

Thus  Dante  recognizes,  as  we  have  seen,  the  dis- 
tinction between  Revelation  and  Reason  and  the 
supremacy  of  the  latter.  But  the  distinction  finds  no 
recognition  in  the  symbolism  of  the  Convivio  and 
makes  no  contribution  to  its  store  of  examples.  In 
like  manner  the  Christian  contrast  between  the 
practical  and  the  contemplative  life  is  expressed  in 
no  such  symbolism  as  that  of  Leah  and  Rachel  in  the 
John  iii :  1 1 .  Luke  v  :  6. 
103 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

Comedy,  and  has  not  worked  itself  into  conscious 
separation  from  the  AristoteHan  contrast  between 
the  practical  or  civic  and  the  theoretical  or  speculative 
life.  But,  on  the  other  hand,  the  whole  range  of 
earthly  activities  and  speculations  already  catch  a 
glow  from  their  association  with  their  heavenly 
analogues,  are  uplifted  into  a  region  of  intenser 
spiritual  fervour,  and  are  inspired  with  a  deeper 
significance  by  the  reaction  upon  them  of  the  theo- 
logical studies  which  have  not  yet  asserted  their 
direct  ascendency  in  the  student's  mind.  In  all  this 
the  Convivio  represents  an  advance  towards  some- 
thing not  yet  fully  apprehended.  It  is  expectant  and 
transitional.  It  does  not  reveal,  as  has  sometimes 
been  supposed,  a  lapse  from  a  more  advanced  posi- 
tion once  held,  but  a  reaching  forth  towards  one  yet 
to  be  taken. 

These  characteristics  of  the  Convivio  we  must  now 
bring  out  in  detail.  To  begin  with,  Dante  accepts  the 
distinction  between  Reason  and  Revelation  and  the 
more  exalted  claims  of  the  latter  without  qualification. 
This  could  hardly  be  otherwise,  for  at  this  time  he 
was  a  diligent  student  of  the  Contra  Gentiles  of  S. 
Thomas,  and  this  very  distinction  and  gradation  is 
the  vertebral  column  to  which  all  the  members  of 
that  treatise  are  articulated.  **  The  Emperor  of  the 
Universe,'*  Dante  declares,  being  "  the  light  which 
illuminates  us  in  the  darkness,"  told  us  the  truth 
about  the  angels,  "  which  we  could  not  know, 
neither  truly  see,  without  him.''  There  are  truths 
II.  vi :  8-20  [v  :  2,  3]. 
104 


THE     "CONVIVIO''     DIDACTIC 

concerning  our  immortality  which  **  we  see  perfectly 
by  Faith,  but  see  by  Reason  with  a  certain  darkening 
shadow."  He  who  created  our  reason  expressly 
willed  that  it  should  not  cover  the  whole  range  of 
his  power,  and  established  upon  the  miracles  that 
transcend  reason's  grasp  that  faith  which  matters 
more  to  the  human  race  than  anything  else  what- 
ever, since  by  it  we  escape  eternal  death  and  gain 
eternal  life.  Where  the  teaching  of  the  philosophers 
and  of  Christian  doctrine  coincide,  **  the  Christian 
doctrine  is  of  greater  force,  and  shatters  all  cavil  in 
virtue  of  the  supreme  light  of  heaven  that  illuminates 
it."  For  holy  Church  is  the  "  spouse  and  secretary  " 
of  Christ,  "  who  cannot  lie."  And  so  in  the  Song 
of  Songs  **  all  the  sciences  are  called  queens  and  con- 
cubines and  handmaidens,"  but  Theology  "is  called 
the  dove,  because  she  is  subject  to  no  aspersions 
of  contention  ;  and  she  is  called  perfect,  because  she 
gives  us  perfect  vision  of  the  Truth  in  which  our 
soul  finds  rest."  So  far  all  is  in  very  near  conformity 
with  the  teaching  of  the  Contra  Gentiles, 

Yet  it  was  from  Boetius  and  Cicero,  as  he  tells  us, 
and  not  from  the  Bible  or  Aquinas,  that  Dante  had 
learned  to  regard  my  Lady  Philosophy  as  "  a  thing 
supreme  "  and  to  hail  her  as  "  The  daughter  of  God, 
the  Queen  of  all."  And  even  where  he  expressly 
contrasts    the    Natural    and    the    Theological    ap- 

II.  ix :  127  sq.  [viii :  1 5] ;  III.  vii :  1 57  /ff.  [i  5  /f.] ;  IV.  iv  : 
90-96  [9];  II.  vi:  33/f.,  iv:  31/f.  [v:  5,  iii :  10],  xv:  179- 
184  [xiv:  20].  Cf.  Song  of  Songs  vi :  8,  9  [Fulg.  7,  8];  xiii ; 
14-74  [xii:  2-9]. 

105 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

preaches  to  truth  he  seems  insensible  to  any  real 
difference  between  them;  for  when  after  treating  of 
the  divine  seed  of  Nobility  in  man  by  **  the  natural 
way  "  he  turns  to  the  consideration  of  the  same  sub- 
ject "  by  the  theological  way  "  he  quotes  Isaiah, 
indeed,  on  the  seven  Gifts  of  the  Spirit,  but  the  only 
conclusion  he  reaches  is  the  very  "  natural  '*  one 
that  man  should  exercise  himself  in  right  conduct 
and  the  restraint  of  his  passions  **  as  Augustine,  and 
also  Aristotle,  would  have  him  do/*  And  yet  it  is  on 
this  very  passage  in  Isaiah  that  Aquinas  founds  his 
doctrine  of  the  difference  between  the  "  natural  *' 
and  the  "  infused  '*  virtues,  and  erects  his  whole 
theory  of  the  higher  Christian  Ethic  which  (rising 
far  above  the  natural  ethic  of  Aristotle)  expresses 
itself  in  the  Sermon  on  the  Mount  and  specifically 
in  the  Beatitudes.  No  clearer  proof  could  be  needed 
that  at  this  time,  though  Dante  had  accepted  the 
conception  of  Christian  faith  and  experience  which 
afterwards  found  its  symbol  in  Beatrice,  he  had  not 
yet  assimilated  it.  And  again,  in  the  very  sentence  in 
which  he  identifies  his  Lady  with  the  Logos  of  the 
Gospel  of  John,  he  goes  on  to  illustrate  the  all- 
absorbing  devotion  with  which  she  inspires  her 
lovers  by  citing  the  examples  of  Democritus,  Plato, 
Aristotle,  Zeno,  Socrates,  and  Seneca  without  ad- 
ducing a  single  instance  from  the  Old  or  New 
Testament  or  from  the  lives  of  Christian  saints  or 
heroes. 

IV.  xxi :   100-133  [11-14]. 

III.  xiv  :  62-100  [7-10]. 

106 


THE     "CONVIVIO"     DIDACTIC 

It  need  not  surprise  us  after  this  to  find  that  on 
Dante's  lips  the  **  Celestial  Athens  *'  is  as  natural  an 
expression  for  Heaven  as  the  **  Celestial  Jerusalem  " 
would  be,  and  in  a  beautiful  symbolic  passage  we 
actually  find  him  saying  of  the  virtues  of  Faith, 
Hope,  and  Charity  that  "  it  is  by  these  virtues  that 
we  rise  to  that  celestial  Athens  where  Stoics,  Peri- 
patetics, and  Epicureans,  in  the  light  of  the  eternal 
Truth,  harmoniously  unite  in  one  will."  Though  in 
another  place,  with  closer  approach  to  Christian  pro- 
priety, he  takes  the  three  Marys  at  the  tomb  of 
Christ  as  symbols  of  the  **  three  sects  of  the  active 
(as  distinguished  from  the  contemplative)  life — to 
wit,  the  Epicureans,  the  Stoics,  and  the  Peripatetics,'* 
who  seek  the  true  blessedness  where  it  is  not  to  be 
found,  namely,  "  in  the  tomb,  which  is  to  say  in  this 
present  world."  Dante  is  rightly  admired  for  his  con- 
sistency, but  it  is  not  to  the  Convivio  that  his 
admirers  must  appeal  when  they  wish  to  illustrate 
this  characteristic.  The  Boetian  net  is  not  yet  broken, 
but  it  is  under  a  strain  that  it  cannot  long  bear  ; 
and  it  is  worth  noting  that  the  passage  last  cited — 
the  nearest  to  the  doctrine  of  the  Comedy  that  we 
have  yet  noticed — occurs  in  the  last  Treatise  of  the 
Convivio^  the  one  in  which  the  allegorical  system  of 
interpretation  of  the  Odes  is  abandoned.  We  shall 
presently  see  (p.  115  sqq.)  that  in  another  respect  also 
this  same  Book,  or  Treatise,  betrays  the  ripening  of 
Dante's  mind  towards  its  full  maturity  ;  but  mean- 
Ill.  xiv.  1 36-141  [15];  IV.  xxii :  149-174  [14,  15]  (reading 
of  the  Florentine  Testo  Critico). 

107 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

while  this  wavering  treatment  of  the  Ethnic  schools 
of  philosophy  challenges  attention  to  the  unstable 
equilibrium  of  the  teaching  of  the  Convivio  on  the 
subject  of  the  relation  of  earthly  to  heavenly  fruition. 
And  this  brings  us  to  the  next  point.  The  Aristo- 
telian distinction  between  the  Practical  or  Civic 
and  the  Theoretic  or  Speculative  life  is  in  a  measure 
parallel  to  the  Christian  distinction  between  the 
Active  and  the  Contemplative  life.  But  the  two 
systems  are  far  from  completely  coinciding.  The 
Practical  life,  as  conceived  by  Aristotle,  is  concerned 
with  those  activities  which  make  a  man  a  good 
citizen,  alike  in  the  offices  of  peace  and  of  war,  while 
the  Christian  writers  generally  mean  by  the  Active 
life  devotion  to  **  good  works  '*  ;  and  again,  on 
Aristotle's  lips  the  Speculative  life  covers  every  form 
of  the  pursuit  and  enjoyment  of  truth,  which  is  the 
proper  business  of  the  philosopher  or  student.  It 
includes,  no  doubt,  that  intense  but  effortless  con- 
templation and  enjoyment  of  truth  possessed  which 
is  the  highest  self-realization,  and  which  is  the  only 
life  that  we  can  reasonably  think  of  as  lived  by  the 
Divine  being  or  beings  ;*  but  it  includes  also  every 
humbler  branch  of  the  pursuit  of  truth,  whereas 
the  Christian  **  contemplation  **  is  of  divine  things 
alone.  And  seeing  that  in  this  life  we  can  only  know 
God  by  his  effects  and  never  in  his  essence,  con- 
templation can  never  be  perfect  here.  Only  the 
blessed  spirits,  whether  angels  or  men,  who  "  see 
God  '*  can  live  this  life  at  its  highest ;  though 
pondering  on  the  truths  of  revealed  religion  and  on 

io8 


THE     "CONVIVIO''     DIDACTIC 

the  confident  expectation  of  the  ultimate  vision  may 
already  give  us  a  foretaste  of  heavenly  bliss  even  on 
earth,  and  may  raise  us  almost  above  the  limits  of  our 
human  nature.  Such,  at  least,  was  the  Christian 
doctrine  dominant  in  Dante's  day,  and  it  is  from  this 
doctrine  that  the  Comedy,  as  a  living  and  organic 
whole,  draws  its  vital  breath.  Thus  Dante's  illus- 
trations of  contemplation,  not  only  in  heaven,  but  on 
earth,  are  drawn  in  the  Comedy  from  the  ranks  of  the 
Christian  mystics  :  a  Richard  of  S.  Victor  who 
**  was  more  than  man  "  in  his  concentration  of 
thought  on  divine  things,  a  Bernard  "  who  in  this 
life,  by  contemplation,  tasted  of  the  peace "  of 
heaven,  or  a  Dionysius  "  who  saw  deepest  into  the 
nature  and  the  ministrations  *'  of  the  angels,  in  virtue 
of  "  the  great  passion  with  which  he  set  himself  to 
the  contemplation  of  their  orders."  But  in  the 
Convivio  it  is  otherwise.  Dante  does  indeed  re- 
peatedly and  clearly  announce  the  principle  that  the 
full  felicity  of  contemplation,  which  consists  in  seeing 
God,  cannot  be  attained  in  this  life.  This  same 
article  of  faith  is  developed  with  extreme  beauty  and 
eloquence  by  S.  Thomas  in  the  Contra  Gentiles^  and 
Dante  had  accepted  it  as  true.  But,  for  all  that, 
throughout  the  Convivio  he  habitually  speaks  of  the 
Active  and  the  Practical  life  or  the  Contemplative 
and  the  Speculative  life  as  if  the  two  phrases  were 

ParaJiso  iv  :  1 24-129,  vi :  1 9-2 1,  xix  :  1 5,  xiii :  61-69,  xxxiii : 
1 39-141  and  passim^x;  131  sq.,  xxxi  :  109-iir,  x:  11 5-1 17. 
Cf.  Epist.  x:  sec.  28  [xiii :  77-82].  Convivio  III.  xiii :  90-101  [9]*; 
IV.  xxii :  140  sqq.f  194  /f .  [i  3  /f .,  1 7  /f .]  (M core's  reading). 

109 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

synonymous  ;  and  he  generally  keeps  well  within 
the  range  of  Aristotle  when  speaking  of  the  latter. 
The  "  works  of  God  and  of  Nature  "  (rather  than 
God  himself)  are  described  in  one  passage  as  the 
proper  objects  of  **  contemplation  "  or  **  specula- 
tion ** ;  and  in  another,  when  speaking  of  the  happy 
end  of  an  old  man  whose  "  good  works  and  con- 
templations '*  have  already  **  severed  him  from  all 
mundane  affairs  and  cogitations,  and  surrendered 
him  to  God,"  he  takes  as  his  first  example  the  aged 
Cato  as  portrayed  in  the  De  Senectute,  Lancelot  and 
Guido  Montefeltrano  follow  later  on  !  But  Dante 
seems  to  half-grudge  the  admission  (explicitly  as  he 
makes  it)  that  the  perfection  of  bliss  is  not  to  be 
attained  in  this  life  by  the  lover  of  philosophy,  for  he 
declares  that  whereas  the  active  life  and  the  exercise 
of  the  moral  virtues  can  give  us  only  an  imperfect 
felicity,  yet  we  may  attain  it  **  almost  in  perfection  '* 
by  the  exercise  of  the  intellectual  virtues.  Indeed, 
this  intellectual  vision  is  so  perfect,  when  in  its  per- 
fection, that  it  may  not  improperly  be  called  perfect, 
even  in  its  imperfect  state.  And,  again,  he  tells 
us  that  the  sage  is  not  insatiable,  like  the  miser, 
because  human  desires  **  in  this  life  **  should  be 
regulated  by  the  possibilities  of  our  human  faculties, 
so  that  it  is  not  natural  to  us  even  to  desire  to  know 
what  God  really  is.  And  in  yet  another  passage  the 
qualification  is  still  further  reduced,  and  we  learn 
that  the  eyes  (demonstrations)  and  the  smile  (per- 
suasions) of  Philosophy  confer  "  the  loftiest  joy  of 
IV.  ixii :  113  Jf.  [11],  iiviii :  39-65  [5-8]. 

no 


THE     "CONVIVIO*'      DIDACTIC 

blessedness,  which  is  the  supreme  good  of  Paradise," 
and  that  while  *'  all  else  here  below  **  leaves  an 
unsated  longing,  yet  in  this  intercourse  with  Philo- 
sophy "  man,  as  man,  feels  his  every  desire  fulfilled 
and  so  is  blessed.'*  This  (in  spite  of  the  qualification 
**  as  man  ")  runs  quite  counter  to  the  teaching  of 
Aquinas,  who  would  have  the  intelligence  always 
straining  against  its  earthly  limitations,  seeking  ana- 
logies, within  its  own  range,  for  truths  that  lie  be- 
yond it,  and  consciously  yearning  for  the  satisfaction 
that  will  at  last  come  to  it  in  heaven.  This  attitude 
of  mind,  which,  as  we  have  seen,  is  Dante's  in  the 
Comedy,  is  essentially  foreign  to  his  feelings  and 
dispositions  in  the  Convivio, 

All  this,  if  pressed,  would  amount  to  a  definite 
renunciation  of  the  longings  of  the  Christian  mystics 
afterwards  glorified  in  the  Comedy.  But  nothing  in 
the  Convivio  must  be  pressed.  It  is  the  work  of  a 
thinker  in  the  making,  and  its  inconsistencies, 
whether  real  or  apparent,  are  those  of  an  enthusiast 
who  believes  without  question  much  that  has  not  yet 
come  under  assimilating  contact  with  his  personal 
experience  and  feeling  or  been  submitted  to  the 
pressure  of  his  systematic  thought. 

But  Dante  has  already  felt  and  experienced  more 
than  he  can  contain,  and  he  overflows  with  the  long- 
ing to  share  his  treasures  before  he  has  rightly 
counted  them.  The  Arabian  interpreters  of  Aristotle 
never  drew  the  sharp  line  between  powers  natural  to 
man  and  powers  above  his  human  nature,  to  be  con- 

III.  xiii:  101-107  [10],  XV  :  12-55,  76-110  [2-5,  8-10]. 
Ill 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

ferred  upon  him  in  heaven  ;  and  consequently  they 
believed  that  in  this  Hfe  the  highest  mystic  insight 
was  ideally  attainable.  This  was  contrary  to  the 
teaching  of  Aquinas,  but  while  Dante  believed  with 
him  he  felt  with  the  Arabians.  This  was  the  cause  of 
some  uncertainty  or  even  contradiction  in  expression, 
but  not  of  any  strain  or  conflict  in  feeling.  For  the 
things  Dante  was  actually  thinking  about  were  well 
within  the  limits  of  Aristotelian,  to  say  nothing  of 
Arabian,  "  speculation,'*  and  even  when  his  matter 
was  most  specifically  Christian  he  was  never  con- 
scious of  needing  any  direct  support  that  could  not 
be  found  in  Aristotelian  principles.  Thus,  in  con- 
nection with  the  long  disquisition  on  the  different 
aspects  under  which  the  several  orders  of  the 
angels  contemplate  the  Persons  of  the  Trinity 
and  their  relations  to  each  other  he  argues  that 
the  contemplating  angels  must  be  indefinitely 
more  numerous  than  the  active  ones  (though, 
indeed,  the  activity  of  these  latter  is  itself  of  the 
nature  of  "  speculation  *'),  and  in  discussing  a  point 
of  difliculty  he  refers  to  no  other  authority  than 
that  of  Aristotle,  with  his  doctrine  of  the  Practical 
and  the  Speculative  life  and  his  contention  that  the 
latter  alone  is  fully  consonant  with  the  nature  of 
the  immaterial  beings  who  preside  over  the  circula- 
tion of  the  heavens. 

So  far  we  have  met  with  little  or  nothing  to 
indicate  any  closer  connection  than  that  of  juxta- 
position between  Dante's  obviously  sincere  and  even 
Convivio  II.  v  :  89  s^q.  [iv  :  13]. 
112 


THE     "CONVIVIO"     DIDACTIC 

glowing  professions  of  Christian  conviction  in  the 
Convivio  and  the  almost  exclusively  Ethnic  or  secular 
character  of  his  whole  store  of  illustrations,  his 
gallery  of  worthies,  and  the  range  of  subjects  on 
which  his  mind  has  been  exercised  and  to  which  he 
longs  to  introduce  his  readers.  Even  where  he  does 
use  Christian  illustrations  it  is  for  the  sake  of  secular 
applications. 

This  last  remark  brings  us  incidentally  to  the  real 
heart  of  this  branch  of  our  investigation.  The  centre 
of  gravity  of  Dante's  interest,  it  is  true,  still  lies  well 
within  the  scope  of  secular  studies  and  ideals  ;  but, 
nevertheless,  a  vivid  belief  that  the  personified 
Philosophy  which  consoled  Boetius,  and  first  con- 
soled and  then  inspired  Dante  himself,  is  in  truth 
no  other  than  that  very  Wisdom  of  God  which 
brought  salvation  to  the  world  gives  to  the  teacher 
of  secular  wisdom  a  sense  of  consecration,  a  mission- 
ary ardour,  and  a  reverence  for  his  task  which 
catches  its  tone  from  the  preachers  of  the  sacred  and 
unfailing  truths  of  Revelation.  And  so  the  im- 
mediate effect  of  Dante's  theological  studies  is  to  be 
found  less  in  any  quickened  interest  in  theology  itself 
than  in  their  reaction  upon  his  intellectual,  moral, 
social,  and  political  ideals  and  impulses. 

It  is  especially  the  Contra  Gentiles^  which  we  can 
trace  in  its  formative  reaction  and  its  warming  effect 
upon  the  spirit  of  the  Convivio, 

Thus  the  noble  exordium  of  the  Convivio  is  closely 
modelled  on  a  corresponding  utterance  in  the  Contra 
Gentiles.    S.  Thomas  is  arguing  that  it  was  fitting 

113  H 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

for  Revelation  not  only  to  give  assurance  concerning 
mysteries  that  transcend  the  scope  of  human  powers, 
but  also  to  confirm  many  truths  that  are  not  really 
past  finding  out  by  philosophy,  because  otherwise 
very  few  indeed  would  gain  even  a  relatively  firm 
grasp  of  them.  Amongst  the  reasons  for  this 
Thomas  enumerates  the  lack  of  time  and  opportunity 
which  bars  out  most  men  from  the  long  and  severe 
studies  requisite  for  mastering  philosophic  truth, 
the  pressure  of  practical  business,  and  the  intellec- 
tual sluggishness  which  makes  many  men  compara- 
tively indifferent  to  intellectual  truth.  Dante  adopts 
and  adapts  this  argument  with  passionate  conviction 
and  enthusiasm,  but  he  employs  it  not  to  show  the 
necessity  of  Revelation  but  to  demonstrate  the  duty 
and  the  privilege  of  the  Student  to  propagate  be- 
yond the  academic  walls  the  whole  range  of  philo- 
sophic and  scientific  truth.  "  University  Extension  '* 
(if  an  emeritus  Extensioner  may  be  allowed  to  put  it 
so)  received  a  consecration  from  its  analogy  with  the 
outflowing  of  Revelation  beyond  its  exclusive 
domain  ;  nay,  Dante  can  appropriate  to  his  own 
mission,  in  teaching  philosophy  to  the  laity  who  are 
ignorant  of  Latin,  the  glowing  phrases  uttered  by 
prophet  and  evangelist  in  relation  to  the  shining  of 
the  light  of  Christ  and  of  his  Gospel  upon  the 
Heathen  and  Jewish  darkness  ;  or  can  compare  his 
projected  popularizing  of  Philosophy  with  Christ's 
miraculous  feeding  of  the  multitude. 

Contra  Gentiles  I.  iv.   Convwio  I.  i,  xiii :  82-89  [^^J.   Cf.  John 
vi :   10-13;   Isaiah  ix  :   2;   Matthew  iv  :   16,  etc. 


THE     "CONVIVIO"     DIDACTIC 

Again,  in  his  Contra  Gentiles  Aquinas  contrasts 
certain  false  or  imperfect  views  held  by  Jewish, 
Saracen,  or  Pagan  sages  with  the  rounded  and  per- 
fect teaching  of  Christian  scholarship  ;  and  when 
Dante  took  up  arms  against  false  and  unworthy  con- 
ceptions of  what  constitutes  true  Nobility — views 
which  had  gained  wide  currency,  or  could  appeal  to 
high  authority — he  felt  that,  in  his  mission  of  de- 
fending lofty  ideals  of  human  excellence  and  social 
distinction  against  vulgar  or  haughty  pretensions,  he 
was  engaged  in  a  work  that  might  well  rank  with 
S.  Thomas's  defence  of  Christian  truth.  And  so  he 
desired  to  call  his  Ode  on  true  Nobility  Contra  gli 
errantly  in  avowed  imitation  of  what  Aquinas  wrote 
"  to  the  confusion  of  all  who  swerve  from  our  faith.** 

But  far  the  most  important  of  the  reactions  of 
Theology  upon  the  secular  thought  of  Dante,  and  the 
one  that  points  us  forward  most  distinctly  to  the 
Monarchia  and  the  Comedy,  is  to  be  found  in  its 
influence  upon  his  conception  of  the  significance  of 
the  Roman  Empire  and  Roman  Law. 

I  suppose  it  IS  generally  recognized  that  Roman 
Law  had  reacted  upon  the  regulation  of  ecclesiastical 
institutions,  and  even  upon  Christian  dogma.  The 
Decretals  were  modelled  upon  the  Corpus  Juris  ; 
and  forensic  theory  and  practice  had  defined  the 
conception  of  the  Atonement.  The  Decretalists 
would  study  Roman  Law  less  for  its  own  sake  than 
as  a  guide  and  standard  by  means  of  which  they 
might  bring  method  and  system  into  their  own 
Convhio  IV.  xix  :  23-30  [3]. 

"5 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

ecclesiastical  legislation.  As  they  read  and  admired 
the  Justinian  Code  their  constant  preoccupation 
would  be  with  the  concerns  of  the  Church  and  the 
application  of  standardized  legal  principles  to  her 
requirements.  My  suggestion  is  that  during  the 
Convivio  period,  and  to  some  extent  afterwards, 
Dante  was  reversing  the  same  process  on  another 
field,  and  that  whereas  the  Decretalists  brought 
system  from  Civil  into  Ecclesiastical  Law,  Dante 
brought  system  from  his  belief  in  the  providential 
guidance  of  sacred  history  into  his  conception  of  the 
development  of  law  and  order  in  the  regulation  of 
the  temporal  affairs  of  men,  from  its  first  beginning 
to  its  final  embodiment  in  Roman  Law  and  the 
Roman  Empire. 

The  significance  of  the  reclaiming  of  the  waste  of 
secular  history  and  bringing  it  into  parallelism  with 
its  spiritual  analogue  in  the  history  of  Revelation 
and  the  Church  can  only  be  appreciated  fully  by 
reference  to  its  perfected  outcome  in  the  Monarchia 
and  the  Comedy ;  but  it  is  already  in  an  advanced 
stage  of  embryonic  development  in  the  Convivio^ 
and  its  revolutionary  character  is  already  plain 
enough. 

The  textbook  of  Roman  and  universal  history 
from  which  Dante  and  his  contemporaries  drew  their 
first  impressions  on  these  subjects  was  written  by 
Orosius  at  the  request  of  Augustine  for  the  express 
purpose  of  contrasting  the  orderly  guidance  of 
sacred  history  by  Divine  Providence  with  the  welter 
of  chaotic  passions  presented  by  the  blood-stained 

Ii6 


THE     "CONVIVIO"     DIDACTIC 

annals  of  the  world  in  which  violence  perpetually 
reigned  in  the  place  of  law. 

Dante,  as  he  expressly  tells  us,  at  one  time  ac- 
cepted this  reading  of  secular  history,  and  in  dealing 
with  the  Monarchia  I  shall  try  to  trace  the  steps  by 
which  his  practical  acquaintance  with  the  civilizing 
power  of  Roman  Law,  his  study  of  Virgil,  his  inborn 
sense  of  the  beauty  and  the  divine  sanctions  of 
human  relationships  and  emotions,  his  vision  of 
Eden,  and  his  studies  of  theology  led  him  at  last  to 
exalt  the  ideal  Roman  Empire  into  an  analogue  on 
the  temporal  side  of  life  with  the  Church  on  its 
spiritual  side.  All  this  is  worked  out  in  the  Monarchia 
and  intimately  assimilated  and  illustrated  in  the 
Comedy.  It  is  far  from  having  taken  its  final  form 
in  the  Convivio^  but  it  is  there  in  more  than  germ. 
For  Dante  already  argues  that  it  is  essential  to  the 
wellbeing  of  the  human  race  that  its  unity  and  har- 
mony should  be  secured  by  a  central  authority 
capable  of  controlling  the  ambitions  of  the  several 
states  and  removing  the  occasions  of  war  between 
them.  It  is  from  this  supreme  authority  that  all 
subordinate  commands  derive  their  force.  And 
history,  enforced  by  the  sanction  of  miracles,  shows 
that  the  Roman  People  was  the  divinely  appointed 
instrument  of  this  supreme  control.  The  Roman 
Emperor,  then,  as  the  representative  of  the  Roman 
People,  is  still  the  fountain  and  guardian  of  Universal 
Law.  The  exposition  of  this  doctrine  comes  in  quite 
incidentally  in  the  Convivio^  but  the  eloquence  and 
enthusiasm  by  which  it  is  animated  give  unmis- 

117 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

takable  proof  that  it  is  already  an  essential  factor  in 
Dante's  philosophy  of  life.  The  conception  of 
sacred  history  as  providentially  guided  and  miracu- 
lously sanctioned  has  already  reacted  upon  his  con- 
ception of  the  meaning  of  Roman  history,  and  he 
already  lays  stress  on  what  he  regards  as  a  supremely 
significant  chronological  coincidence  between  the 
birth  of  David  (the  ancestor  of  the  Virgin)  and  the 
foundation  of  Rome.  These  two  events  mark  the 
origin  of  two  streams  the  confluence  of  which 
determined  the  culminating  event  of  history  ;  for  it 
was  when  Rome  had,  for  the  moment,  fulfilled  her 
mission  of  bringing  the  world  to  universal  peace 
that  the  Son  of  God  descended  to  earth  to  resolve 
the  discord  that  the  sin  of  the  first  man  had  brought 
into  human  life.  And  so,  too,  it  must  be  under 
Roman  Law  that  human  affairs  shall  be  so  regulated 
at  last  as  to  assimilate  human  society  to  "an  all- 
embracing  religious  order." 

Yet  here  again  the  implications  so  clearly  indicated 
remain  undeveloped.  There  is  not  a  word  in  the 
Convivio  as  to  the  contrast  and  co-ordination  of 
the  Empire  and  the  Church  as  the  two  ruling  powers 
in  the  world  of  man  (for  even  when  humanity  is 
ideally  contemplated  as  one  united  '*  religious  order  ** 
it  is  to  the  ideal  Emperor  that  it  owes  its  allegiance, 
as  to  its  head),  and  therefore  there  can  as  yet  be 
no  special  association  of  Reason  with  the  Empire 
and  Revelation  with  the  Church.  Nor  can  the  dis- 
cord of  these  two  powers  be  alleged,  as  it  is  in  the 
Convivio  IV.  iv  :  59-81  [6]. 
118 


THE     "CONVIVIO''     DIDACTIC 

Comedy,  as  the  cause  of  the  evil  estate  of  the  world. 
In  the  Convivio^  in  spite  of  the  foreshadowing  of 
later  developments,  we  are  still  in  the  simpler  world 
of  the  Aristotelian  partition  between  the  practical 
and  the  speculative  spheres.  There  is  Imperial  and 
there  is  Philosophical  authority,  and  the  only  pity 
is  that  the  rulers  of  the  world  neither  by  their  own 
study  nor  by  taking  counsel  with  others  add  the 
weight  of  philosophical  authority  to  the  acts  of  their 
government. 

The  general  outcome  of  this  long  examination 
may  now  be  briefly  summarized.  The  Convivio  re- 
veals, even  while  it  conceals,  traces  of  those  de- 
flections and  aberrations  from  high  ideals  and  high 
endeavour  for  which  Beatrice  rebukes  Dante  in  the 
Earthly  Paradise.  But  these  delinquencies  are  al- 
ready things  of  the  past.  They  haunt  Dante  with  a 
sense  of  uneasiness  and  incongruity,  for  his  face  is 
now  steadily  turned  to  the  light  and  he  is  conscious 
of  a  mission  that  seems  to  him  still  higher  than  the 
one  to  which  he  devoted  himself  in  the  last  words  of 
the  Vita  Nuova,  But  there  is  something  gone  that 
has  not  been  recaptured.  A  certain  bloom  has  been 
brushed  away.  An  aroma  has  vanished.  But  if  grace 
and  charm  have  been  lost,  strength  has  been  gained. 
In  intellectual  range,  in  robustness  of  mind,  in 
knowledge  of  men  and  things  the  Convivio  fully 
justifies  Dante's  own  estimate  of  it  when  he  con- 

Purgatorio  xvi :  94-1 12  ;  xxx,  xxxi.  ParaJiso  xx  :  55-60. 

119 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

trasts  its  **  temperate  and  virile  "  note  with  the 
**  fervid  and  impassioned  '*  utterances  of  the  Fita 
Nuovay  and  when  he  pleads  that  each  should  be 
regarded  as  consonant  with  the  period  of  life  at 
which  it  was  written.  The  frequency  with  which 
commentators  find  their  best  illustrations  of  the 
Comedy  in  passages  from  the  Convivio  is  evidence 
of  the  vast  stores  of  material  ultimately  to  be  ab- 
sorbed into  the  Comedy  which  Dante  had  gathered 
and  partly  systematized  in  the  great  prose  fragment 
that  preceded  it.  It  is  already  clear  that  in  many 
respects  the  Convivio  stands  between  the  Beatrice  of 
the  Vita  Nuova^  from  whom  it  seems  to  be  moving 
away,  and  the  Beatrice  of  the  Comedy,  to  whom  in  so 
many  respects  it  seems  to  be  approaching. 

Gratuitous  confusion  is  introduced  into  our  pro- 
blem if  we  read  the  Beatrice  of  the  Comedy  into  her 
of  the  Vita  Nuova,  But  if  we  take  each  of  them  quite 
simply  as  we  find  them  we  can  at  least  lay  firm  hold 
of  this  clue.  Whatever  else  is  doubtful  it  is  certain 
that,  whereas  Dante^s  Christian  faith  never,  so  far 
as  we  have  evidence,  for  a  moment  wavered,  his 
interest  in  theological  studies  and  his  intellectual 
grasp  of  them  show  a  steady  progress  in  a  uniform 
direction  from  the  Vita  Nuova^  through  the  Convivio 
(and  we  may  already  add  by  anticipation  the  Monar- 
chia\  to  the  Comedy. 

But   we   have   not  yet   found   all   the   unifying 

formulae  that  give  cohesion  to  the  Comedy.    The 

memory  of  Beatrice  has  made  way  for  a  successful 

Convivio  I.  i :  1 1 1-127  [16  /f.]. 

120 


THE     "CONVIVIO         DIDACTIC 

rival,  and  the  two  loves  have  not  found  their  har- 
mony. The  authority  of  the  Church  is  recognized, 
but  she  is  not  yet  raised  to  her  position  as  a  ruling 
power  over  the  lives  of  men,  regulating  their  relations 
to  things  eternal  as  the  Empire  regulates  their  rela- 
tion to  the  things  of  time.  The  distinctions  between 
Reason  and  Revelation,  between  Study  and  Contem- 
plation, between  Pagan  and  Christian  philosophy, 
though  recognized,  have  not  been  inwardly  assimi- 
lated. But  in  all  these  respects  the  Convivio  repre- 
sents an  advance  towards  the  thoughts  that  are  to 
dominate  the  Comedy,  not  a  recession  from  them  ; 
and  meanwhile  Dante's  sincere  conviction  that  in 
studying  any  branch  whatever  of  philosophy  or 
science  he  is  indeed  holding  converse  with  the 
Divine  **  Wisdom  "  herself,  hymned  in  the  lyrics 
of  the  Old  Testament  and  incarnate  in  the  central 
figure  of  the  New,  gives  a  warmth  and  a  glow  to  his 
devotion  to  his  Lady  which  raise  it  almost  to  the 
quality  of  a  mystic  experience. 

The  beliefs  of  the  Convivio  already  hold  in  solution 
the  Vision  of  the  Comedy.  When  and  how  shall  its 
tense  but  undifferentiated  emotion  thrill  to  the 
breath  of  heaven,  impregnated  with  the  ecstasies  of 
the  Saints — and  of  hell  laden  with  the  sighs  of  the 
exiled  Sages  and  the  tumult  of  the  citid  dolente  ? 


121 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 


>  ) 


V.     THE    '*MONARCHIA  AND     THE 

COMEDY 

The  development  of  Dante*s  theory  of  the  Roman 
Empire  will  furnish  us  with  the  clue  we  need.  But 
in  order  to  follow  it  intelligently  we  must  glance  at 
the  political  side  of  Dante's  life,  which  we  have  so 
far  left  untouched. 

It  is  essential  to  the  proper  understanding  of 
Dante's  political  career  to  throw  into  the  back  of  our 
minds  the  names  of  Guelf  and  Ghibelline  and  to 
relinquish  all  attempt  to  express  the  facts  under  these 
misleading  denominations.  The  Florentine  and 
other  Italian  factions  had  their  origin,  and  must  find 
their  explanation,  in  conditions  that  long  preceded 
the  rise  of  these  names  and  that  often  cut  across  the 
associations  which  they  carry.  The  loose  impression 
that  the  Guelfs  were  the  party  of  the  Pope  and  the 
Ghibellines  the  party  of  the  Emperor  is  particularly 
misleading  when  applied  as  a  key  to  Dante's  political 
aims  and  principles,  and  we  shall  do  best  to  put  it 
altogether  out  of  our  thought. 

Florence,^  in  the  thirteenth  century,  was  nominally 
governed  under  a  modified  system  of  Roman  Law. 
But  a  great  number  of  her  most  powerful  citizens, 
while  quite  willing  to  administer  that  (or  any  other) 

^  It  will  be  obvious  to  the  instructed  reader  that  in  setting  forth 
a  general  theory  as  to  the  racial  and  historical  origins  of  the  Italian 
factions  I  am  a  grateful  disciple  of  Professor  Villari  and  others,  and 
make  no  claim  to  speak  with  any  kind  of  independent  authority. 

122 


THE      "MONARCHIa'*     &     THE      COMEDY 

law,  were  singularly  unwilling  to  obey  it  themselves. 
This  state  of  things  had  its  roots  far  down  in  the 
conditions  resulting  from  the  invasions  of  the 
Barbarians  in  the  earlier  Middle  Ages.  The  con- 
querors found  in  the  Italian  cities  a  matured  tradi- 
tion of  Law  and  probably  an  organized  system  of 
industrial  guilds,  both  of  which  were  alien  to  their 
own  system  of  unwritten  **  customs  '*  and  clan 
organization  for  military  purposes.  Thus  the  con- 
quering and  dominant  classes,  standing  on  a  lower 
level  of  civilization  than  their  subjects  and  at  the 
same  time  despising  their  weakness  and  degradation, 
arrogated  to  themselves  all  administrative  functions. 
In  their  capacity  as  rulers  they  recognized  the  law 
they  found  established  and  were  influenced  by  it  in 
many  ways,  but  they  never  recognized  its  authority 
over  themselves.  Such  authority  as  they  did  allow 
belonged  to  their  own  family  councils,  acting  in 
closer  or  looser  conformity  with  custom  ;  or  else,  in 
case  of  military  necessity,  to  the  authority  of  a  feudal 
chief.  The  history  of  the  rise  of  the  Italian  Republics 
is  the  history  of  the  great  industrial  organizations  re- 
emerging  from  the  waves  of  Teutonic  invasion  and 
asserting  their  right  not  only  to  administer  and 
develop  the  Roman  Law  themselves,  but  also  to  im- 
pose it  upon  all  citizens,  breaking  down  the  clan 
organizations  that  proclaimed  themselves  superior 
to  it.  The  representatives  of  the  military  aristocracy, 
on  the  other  hand,  whenever  they  were  hard  pressed 
by  the  Popolo^  were  apt  to  seek  support  from  their 
natural   feudal   chief,  or  any  other  potentate  that 

123 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

would  assume  his  functions  on  terms  that  gave 
mutual  satisfaction.  Hence  Roman  Law  became  to 
Dante  and  to  others  the  symbol  of  civic  freedom, 
industrial  progress,  and  the  impartial  administration 
of  justice.  Any  power  that  attempted  to  interfere 
with  this  order  of  things  was  their  foe,  and  any  fac- 
tion or  party  that  lent  itself  to  such  hostile  machina- 
tions must  be  resisted  to  the  last. 

Now,  though  the  **  Emperor  '*  had  often  in  earlier 
times  been  the  power  to  be  thus  guarded  against,  it 
happened  when  Dante  was  entering  upon  his  political 
life  in  Florence  that  the  Emperors  had  recently  been 
concerning  themselves  very  little  with  Italian  affairs, 
and  the  danger  now  lay  in  the  pretensions  of  the 
secularly-minded  and  ambitious  Pope  Boniface  the 
Eighth.  It  was  his  intrigues  that  threatened  the 
liberty  and  independence  of  Florence,  and  it  was 
against  them  that  Dante's  efforts  were  consistently 
directed,  especially  when  he  became  a  member  of  the 
Priorate,  or  chief  magistracy,  from  June  15  to 
August  15  in  1300.  His  active,  and  for  the  time 
successful,  opposition  to  Boniface  brought  upon 
him  the  Pontiff's  relentless  hostility  ;  and  when  the 
French  Prince  Charles  of  Valois  (who  was  the  mere 
tool  of  Boniface)  had  raised  himself  to  power  in 
Florence  under  pretence  of  **  pacifying "  the 
"Black"  and  "White"  factions,  the  blow  fell. 
Early  in  1 302  Dante  was  exiled.  On  his  temporary 
alliance  with  the  other  exiled  "  Whites  "  of  his  party, 
and  with  some  of  the  old  Ghibelline  families  banished 
many  years  before,  on  the  brief  duration  of  this 

124 


THE      "MONARCHIa"     &     THE      COMEDY 

alliance,  and  on  its  questionable  significance  we  need 
not  here  dilate.  It  is  only  necessary  to  note  that 
Dante  had  not  been  long  an  exile  before  he  had 
learned  that  party  names  had  very  little  to  do  with 
principles,  and  that  he  could  find  no  true  fellowship 
under  any  of  the  partizan  flags. 

Our  examination  of  the  Convivio  has  already 
shown  us  the  line  along  which  Dante*s  mind  travelled 
during  the  years  that  immediately  succeeded.  And 
in  the  Monarchia^  the  work  to  which  we  must  now 
turn  our  attention,  he  throws  a  retrospective  glance 
on  the  process  by  which  he  reached  his  exalted  con- 
ception of  the  Roman  Empire.  Roman  Law,  we 
know,  had  long  been  the  palladium  of  freedom  and 
good  government  to  the  progressive  elements  in  the 
Italian  Republics.  But  Dante  tells  us  that  the  im- 
pression produced  upon  his  mind  by  his  first  ac- 
quaintance with  Roman  history  had  been  that  of  the 
triumph  of  mere  brute  force.  So  it  was  represented 
by  Orosius,  and  it  must  have  seemed  a  strange 
paradox  to  Dante,  as  soon  as  he  began  to  reflect  on  it, 
that  such  a  bulwark  of  civic  order  and  progress 
should  have  been  built  up  by  such  an  agent.  But  in 
course  of  time,  he  tells  us,  he  came  to  see  that  in  fact 
force  was  only  the  instrument  of  Roman  progress 
and  dominion,  and  that  not  Force,  but  Justice,  was 
its  vital  principle. 

It  is  easy  to  see  that  it  was  Virgil  who  thus  taught 
his  faithful  disciple  to  adjust  his  conception  of 
Roman  history  to  his  knowledge  and  experience  of 

Paradiso  xvii :  61-69. 

125 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

Roman  Law.  For  Virgil  was  Dante's  most  loved  and 
venerated  author  ;  and  of  all  Roman  writers  it  is  he 
who  has  the  clearest  insight  into  the  mission  of 
Rome  as  the  organizer  and  pacifier  of  the  world. 
He  regards  her  political  genius  as  something  more 
august  than  even  the  artistic  and  scientific  genius  of 
Greece  ;  and  he  holds  that  on  her  was  divinely  laid 
the  task  of  inuring  the  nations  to  the  "  habit  of 
peace.** 

It  is  impossible  to  exaggerate  the  significance  of 
this  change  of  conception,  brought  about  in  Dante*s 
mind  by  the  teaching  of  Virgil.  At  a  single  stroke  it 
redeemed  the  whole  field  of  secular  history  from 
chaos.  Henceforth  there  were  for  Dante  two  conver- 
gent streams  of  providentially  guided  history  ;  and 
the  potentate  who  in  Dante's  day  bore  the  name  of 
Emperor,  who  was  crowned  at  Rome,  and  who 
claimed  succession  from  Augustus  and  Justinian, 
was  called  by  his  office  to  the  lofty  function  of  curb- 
ing reckless  ambition,  whether  factious  or  national, 
and  asserting  everywhere  the  majesty  of  Law.  If  the 
Emperor  should  forget  his  high  calling  and  become 
the  mere  feudal  chief  of  a  turbulent  and  lawless 
aristocracy  this  shameful  betrayal  of  a  trust  could  no 
more  rob  the  office  of  its  ideal  lustre  than  the  infamy 
of  a  simoniacal  Pope  could  cancel  the  divine  com- 
mission to  S.  Peter's  successor. 

Unfortunately  this  ideal  conception  of  the  Empire 

had  little  to  support  it  in  the  facts,  or  even  (as  we 

shall  see)  in  the  latent  possibilities  of  the  actual 

jEneidw'w  848-854.  MonarchialL'u 

126 


THE     "MONARCHIA"     &     THE      COMEDY 

situation  ;  yet  Italy  had  never  lost  consciousness  of 
belonging  to  a  European  confederation,  represented 
by  the  tradition  of  the  Empire  ;  and  there  was 
nothing  inconsistent  in  a  man  like  Dante,  who  was 
proud  of  his  descent  from  ancestors  who  had  once 
resisted  Imperial  aggression  on  Florentine  civic 
independence,  nevertheless  regarding  the  Roman 
Emperor,  in  principle,  as  the  God-commissioned 
guardian  of  civic  law  and  arbitrator  between  con- 
tending factions  or  peoples. 

All  these  ideas  we  have  seen  at  work  in  the 
Convivio,  but  they  were  brought  to  sudden  maturity 
by  the  events  of  the  very  year  in  which  that  work 
was  abandoned. 

In  1308  Henry  of  Luxemburg  was  elected  to  the 
Imperial  throne.  He  was  a  man  of  noble  character 
and  great  enthusiasm,  and  he  took  exactly  the  same 
ideal  view  of  his  office  that  Dante  did.  He  hated  the 
very  names  of  Guelf  and  Ghibelline,  and  would  not 
allow  them  to  be  uttered  in  his  presence.  His  duty, 
he  would  often  declare,  was  not  to  Italian  or  French- 
man or  German,  but  to  his  Brother-Man  ;  and  it 
was  well  known  that  he  cherished  exalted  hopes  of 
ending  the  prolonged  agony  of  Italy's  internecine 
feuds,  of  restoring  exiles,  of  reconciling  factions,  and 
of  establishing  the  reign  of  peace  and  law.  If  the 
contemporary  tradition  is  to  be  trusted  it  was  in  con- 
nection with  Henry's  election  and  his  subsequent 
expedition  into  Italy  that  Dante  wrote  the  Monarchia^ 
and  it  was  certainly  then  that  he  wrote  the  great 
Inferno  x  :  40  /ff . 
127 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

Epistles  which  embody  the  same  political  creed  as 
that  treatise. 

We  can  trace  the  effect  of  these  events  upon 
Dante*s  mind  in  the  opening  words  of  the  Monarchia, 
All  that  had  hitherto  enlisted  his  enthusiasm  seems 
to  have  shrivelled  into  insignificance  in  his  mind  ex- 
cept in  so  far  as  it  was  connected  with  the  healing 
mission  of  the  Empire,  or  with  the  spiritual  life 
which  the  Empire  should  always  reverence  and  pro- 
tect. For  it  is  a  noteworthy  fact  that  it  was  just  at 
this  moment  when  he  felt  himself  to  be  greeting  the 
political  Messiah,  in  the  person  of  Henry  VII,  that 
JDante  seems  suddenly  to  have  realized  not  only  the 
scope,  but  the  limitations,  of  the  secular  power — 
not  only  what  the  Empire  could  do,  but  also  what 
lay  beyond  its  reach.  Can  it  have  been  the  friendly 
attitude  at  first  assumed  towards  Henry's  purposes 
by  the  reigning  Pope  Clement  V  that  fired  in  the 
poet's  imagination  the  Vision  of  a  Rome  shone  upon 
by  its  two  great  luminaries  }  Be  that  as  it  may,  we 
find  that  whereas  Dante,  in  the  Monarchia^  is  still 
mainly  concerned  with  the  secular  power  and  makes 
It  one  of  his  chief  concerns  to  vindicate  the  deriva- 
tion of  its  authority,  not  through  the  mediation  of 
the  Church,  but  direct  from  God  himself,  we 
nevertheless  encounter  in  this  treatise  a  quite  new 
development  of  the  conception  of  a  twofold  govern- 
ment of  the  world,  corresponding  to  the  twofold 
nature  of  man  and  his  twofold  destiny  for  earthly 
and  for  heavenly  bliss. 

Monarchia  I.  i  and  passim.     Epistolce  v,  vii. 
128 


THE    "MONARCHIA        &    THE    COMEDY 

Full  Stress  now  falls  upon  the  distinction  between 
Reason  and  Revelation,  which  we  have  seen  theoreti- 
cally recognized  but  practically  ignored  in  the 
Convivio.  We  are  now  told  that  the  one  is  our 
guide  to  the  earthly  blessedness,  in  the  exercise  of 
the  moral  virtues,  which  is  typified  by  the  Terrestrial 
Paradise  ;  and  that  the  other  is  appointed  to  lead  us 
to  the  supernal  bliss  of  Heaven  itself.  And  further, 
that  these  two  principles.  Reason  and  Revelation, 
would  have  sufficed  in'  their  own  strength  to  lead  us 
to  the  respective  goals  had  not  man  fallen.  But  for 
fallen  man  two  organized  regimens,  the  Empire  and 
the  Church,  are  necessary  to  keep  his  recalcitrant 
will  upon  the  track.  The  ideal  Empire  and  Church 
therefore  are  no  more  than  the  instruments  or  em- 
bodiments respectively  of  Reason  and  Revelation. 
In  the  Convivio  Dante  had  already  employed  the 
phrase  ragione  scrina,  or  "  reason  reduced  to 
writing,"  as  a  synonym  for  Roman  Law.  He  now 
develops  the  implications  of  the  Empire's  function 
as  guardian  of  that  Law,  and  teaches  us  that  its 
specific  business  is  to  quell  the  spirit  of  greed,  secure 
justice  (and  with  justice  peace),  and  so  to  enable 
human  civilization  to  advance  towards  its  goal. 
And  this  goal  is  nothing  less  than  the  realization  or 
"  actualizing "  of  all  the  possibilities  of  human 
character  and  intelligence ;  that  is  to  say,  the 
approximate  realization,  even  under  present  earthly 
conditions,  of  that  life  of  Reason  which  man  would 
have  lived  in  the  Garden  of  Eden  had  he  never  fallen. 
Convivio  IV .  11 :  8i  [8]. 

129  I 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

At  the  same  time  the  function  of  the  Church  is 
recognized  as  something  still  higher,  for  it  bears 
the  same  relation  to  man's  eternal  blessedness  that 
the  Empire  does  to  his  earthly  welfare,  and  is  the 
organ  of  Revelation  as  the  Empire  is  of  Reason.  As 
the  Emperor  is  the  supreme  civic  magistrate  so  the 
Pope  is  the  paramount  spiritual  authority,  and  on 
the  harmony  and  faithfulness  of  these  two  the  weal 
of  the  world  depends. 

It  may  be  noticed  too,  in  passing,  that  we  now 
encounter  for  the  first  time  the  problem  of  the  ex- 
clusion of  the  Heathen  from  salvation.  Dante  men- 
tions it  incidentally  as  a  matter  which  unaided  reason 
cannot  fathom,  but  it  appears  to  cause  him  no  acute 
uneasiness  as  yet,  and  he  is  quite  content  to  receive 
it  on  the  authority  of  Revelation. 

And  again,  the  tentative  linking  up  of  the  sacred 
and  secular  histories  which  we  noted  in  the  syn- 
chronisms of  the  Convivio  is  now  developed  into  an 
elaborate  and  startlingly  bold  theory  as  to  the  part 
played  by  the  Roman  Empire  in  the  drama  of  re- 
demption itself;  for  it  is  in  the  Monarchia  that 
Dante  first  advances  the  doctrine,  familiar  to  readers 
of  the  Paradiso^  that  it  was  in  its  capacity  of  divinely 
appointed  ruler  of  the  world  that  the  Roman  Power 
executed  judgement  on  peccant  human  nature,  col- 
lectively **  assumed  '*  in  the  person  of  Christ. 

The  advance  in  Dante's  systematic  thinking  which 
the  Monarchia  registers  must  now  be  evident.    But 

Monarchia  I.  iii,  iv;  III.  ivi  and  passim  \  II.  viii :  23-35  [vii : 
4  Jf .]  ;  II.  xii,  xiii  [xi,  lii].     Cf.  Paradiso  vii. 

130 


THE    "MONARCHIA"    &    THE     COMEDY 

it  is  only  after  long  and  close  study  that  its  full 
significance  can  be  felt.  Augustine  somewhere  lays 
down  the  golden  rule  (would  that  he  had  himself 
observed  it  better  !)  that  no  cardinal  point  of  doc- 
trine is  ever  to  be  sought  in  the  allegory  of  Scripture 
unless  it  is  to  be  found  clearly  set  forth  somewhere 
in  its  letter.  With  the  Monarchia  in  our  hands  we 
may  apply  this  wholesome  doctrine,  with  little  if  any 
qualification,  to  Dante*s  works.  The  Convivio  does 
indeed  furnish  us  with  a  rich  field  on  which  to  collect 
illustrations  of  innumerable  points  of  detail  that  meet 
us  in  the  Comedy,  but  it  is  to  the  Monarchia  that  we 
must  look  for  the  systematic  setting  forth  of  the 
poet's  organic  thought  on  the  meaning  of  life  and 
history,  and  on  the  destiny  of  man  here  and  here- 
after ;  and  it  is  in  this  same  work  that  we  find  the 
key  to  the  allegory  and  the  symbolism  of  the 
Comedy.  The  elaborated  conception  of  the  Roman 
Empire  as  the  restraining  power  that  must  banish 
the  spirit  of  greed  from  earth  and  establish  a  life  of 
well-ordered  human  relations  akin  to  that  of  Eden 
interprets  the  Sunlit  Hill,  the  insatiable  Wolf  and 
the  noble  Hound  of  the  first  Canto  of  the  Inferno, 
The  vindication  of  the  independent  significance  and 
authority  of  the  Empire  illuminates  the  insistence 
on  the  life  of  Eden  as  an  essential  part  of  the  ex- 
perience of  the  saved  which  underlies  the  concluding 
cantos  of  the  Purgatorio,  The  parallelism  of  Empire 
and  Church,  and  the  significance  of  their  close  re- 
lations, as  expounded  in  the  Monarchia^  but  in  no 
earlier  work  of  Dante's,  gives  its  meaning  to  in- 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

numerable  passages  in  the  Comedy,  from  the  juxta- 
position of  the  visits  of  ^neas  and  of  Paul  to  the 
unseen  world  right  on  through  the  elaborated 
warnings  and  examples  on  the  terraces  of  Purgatory. 
It  interprets  Marco  Lombardo*s  diagnosis  of  the 
evil  estate  of  the  world  and  the  pageant  of  the 
confusion  of  the  Powers  which  tells  the  Pilgrim 
through  the  Terrestrial  Paradise  why  so  scanty  a 
stream  of  the  Redeemed  finds  a  way  back  to  the 
natural  abode  of  man.  The  great  discourses  of 
Justinian  and  of  Beatrice  on  the  history  of  Rome, 
on  the  wickedness  of  those  who  make  its  authority  a 
cloak  for  faction,  and  on  its  intimate  connection  with 
the  scheme  of  salvation  itself  are  all  in  perfect 
harmony  with  the  corresponding  chapters  of  the 
Monarchia — are,  in  fact,  sometimes  an  elaboration 
and  sometimes  a  condensation  of  them,  but  never 
a  departure  from  them.  And — not  further  to 
elaborate  the  obvious — though  the  Monarchia  has  no 
symbolism  of  its  own,  yet  its  scheme  of  thought 
tacitly  draws  the  sponge  across  the  symbolism  of  the 
Convivio  while  it  arranges  the  material  in  perfect 
order  for  that  of  the  Comedy. 

The  Lady  of  Dante's  second  love  was  a  vague 
symbol  of  the  Greek  Speculative  or  Theoretical  Life, 
wearing  (loosely  enough)  the  garments  of  the  Divine 
Wisdom,  and  therefore  claiming  to  represent  both 
human  and  divine  science.  The  proper  contrast  to 
her  is  the  Practical  or  Civic  Life.    Accordingly,  in 

Inferno  \\\  10-33.  PurgatorioTv'w  6\S(jq.  Paradisovi'.  1-108, 
vii :   19-120. 

132 


THE    "MONARCHIA"    &    THE     COMEDY 

the  Convivio  Dante  has  already  found  his  contrast 
to  Philosophy,  not  on  the  higher  plane  of  Revelation 
(which  she  theoretically  includes,  though  she  has  not 
really  assimilated  it),  but  in  the  form  of  Civic  Life 
presented  by  the  Roman  institutions,  with  their 
supreme  guardian  in  the  person  of  the  Roman 
Emperor.  Thus,  in  the  fourth  treatise  of  the 
Convivio  he  delimits  the  contrasted  spheres  over 
which  the  Empire  and  philosophy  (represented  in 
this  case  by  Frederick  II  and  Aristotle)  respectively 
exercise  authority.  But  in  the  Monarchia  the  Em- 
peror and  the  Philosopher  cannot  be  contrasted  at  all, 
for  the  Empire  itself  rests  upon  (human)  philosophy, 
or  Reason,  and  the  natural  balance  to  their  joint 
authority  is  found  in  that  of  the  Church,  resting  upon 
Revelation.  And  in  this,  too,  the  Monarchia  explains 
the  Comedy. 

The  all-comprehending  Philosophy  of  the  Con- 
vivio^ then,  falls  into  two  divisions  in  the  Monarchia 
and  in  the  Comedy.  So  far  as  human  reason  can 
carry  it  philosophy  is  no  longer  contrasted  with 
Empire,  but  is  regarded  as  its  naturally  guiding 
principle,  and  in  its  higher  reaches  Revelation  re- 
places Reason  and  inspires  the  Church  as  the  organ 
of  the  divine  science. 

The  Empire,  or  temporal  Monarchy,  is  carefully 
defined  as  supreme  over  the  things  and  relations  of 
Time,  with  tacit  reference  to  the  Spiritual  power 
which  is  concerned  with  the  things  of  Eternity. 

I  Convivio  IV.  vi.  Monarchia  III.  xvi.   Purgatorio  xvi  :  io6— 1 14 ; 

the  Comedy  passim, 
133 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

The  Emperor  is  the  unique  umpire  in  temporal 
affairs,  just  as  Aquinas  had  said  (though  Dante  does 
not  refer  to  him  in  this  connection)  that  it  belonged 
to  the  Pope's  office  to  interpret  authoritatively  the 
voice  of  the  Church.  And  though  the  Emperor  de- 
rives his  authority  direct  from  God  he  should, 
nevertheless,  look  upon  the  Pontiff  with  the  filial 
reverence  that  is  his  due.  And  he  will  irradiate  the 
world  the  better  if  he  is  himself  shone  upon  by  the 
paternal  grace  of  the  successor  of  Peter. 

And,  finally,  the  claim  to  miraculous  sanction 
already  made  for  Rome  in  the  Convivio  is  now 
strengthened  by  citation  of  the  definition  of  a 
miracle  given  by  S.  Thomas  and  the  demonstration 
that  the  miracles  of  Roman  history  conformed 
thereto. 

All  is  ready,  then,  for  the  parallelisms  that  run 
through  the  Comedy,  for  Reason  finding  its  highest 
function  as  the  ally  and  emissary  of  Revelation, 
and  for  the  two  guides  who  are  to  lead  the  pilgrim 
to  Earthly  and  Heavenly  bliss. 

The  closeness  of  the  connection  between  Reason 
and  the  Roman  Empire  and  the  decisive  part  that 
Virgil  actually  played  in  Dante's  mind  in  bringing 
secular  into  vitalizing  connection  with  sacred  history, 
and  so  embracing  both  in  the  same  providential 
scheme,  explains  why,  in  the  Comedy,  Reason,  as 
the  emissary  of  Revelation,  should  be  represented  by 

Monarchia  I.  ii :  3-15   [2  jf.].   Sum.  Theol.  IIa-II«,  i:    10  c. 
Monarchia  I.  x;    II.  passim ^  especially  iv  ;    III.  xvi :    129-140 


THE     "MONARCHIA''    &    THE    COMEDY 

Virgil.  It  was  indeed  Aristotle  who  had  enriched 
Dante's  mind  with  the  material  of  scientific  know- 
ledge and  the  instruments  of  philosophic  thought  ; 
but  it  was  Virgil  who  had  taught  him  to  bring  the 
whole  range  of  human  thought  and  activity  within 
the  light  of  providential  guidance  by  revealing  to 
him  the  meaning  of  Roman  history.  And  since  it 
was  the  specific  business  of  the  Roman  Empire 
inspired  by  Reason  to  bring  men  to  the  earthly 
happiness  and  health  typified  by  the  Terrestrial 
Paradise,  we  can  see  why  Virgil  must  be  the  guide 
not  only  through  Hell,  but  to  Eden. 

And  Beatrice  ?  There  is  not  a  word  about  her  in 
the  Monarchia^  though  it  is  full  of  Virgil  ;  but,  never- 
theless, it  prepares  for  her  the  place  that  she  occupies 
in  the  Paradiso  no  less  than  for  Virgil  his  place  in  the 
Inferno  and  the  Purgatorio,  Can  we  find,  at  least  by 
conjecture,  as  firm  a  link  between  the  Beatrice  of  the 
Vita  Nuova  and  of  the  Paradiso  as  we  have  found  be- 
tween the  Virgil  of  the  Monarchia  and  of  the  Comedy  ? 

Let  us  once  more  summarize  and  define  the 
materials  at  our  command  and  the  problem  we  have 
to  solve.  Dante  tells  (i)  that  he  entered  on  his 
serious  studies  as  a  preparation  for  his  task  of  com- 
memorating Beatrice  more  worthily.  Here  Philo- 
sophy is  an  auxiliary  to  the  memory  of  Beatrice  {Vita 
Nuova),  He  tells  us  afterwards  (2)  that  it  was  con- 
solation for  the  loss  of  Beatrice  that  he  sought  in  the 
study  of  Philosophy  (Convivio)  ;  and  further  (3) 
that  the  actual  study  so  enamoured  him  of  his  new 
mistress  as  to  draw  his  heart  away  from  the  memory 

^35 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

of  Beatrice  and  postpone,  at  least,  if  it  did  not  super- 
sede, his  purpose  of  writing  "more  worthily"  of  her. 
Yet  further  we  find  evidence,  hard  to  resist,  to  the 
effect  that  (4)  this  avowed  eclipsing  of  the  memory 
of  Beatrice  by  the  love  of  Philosophy  was  made  into 
a  literary  veil  wherewith  to  cover  up  the  record  of 
some  actual  unfaithfulness  to  the  ideals  for  which 
Beatrice  had  once  stood  ;  and  this  at  a  time  when 
these  ideals  were  reasserting  their  supremacy  and 
seeking  to  dissociate  themselves  from  all  jarring 
elements  in  the  poet's  past  life  or  utterances  (Can- 
zoni — Convivio — Purgatorio),  And  finally  we  witness 
(5)  the  resolution  of  the  undifferentiated  conception 
of  Philosophy  into  its  two  constituents  of  Reason  and 
Revelation  (Monarchia)  ;  and  (6)  we  meet  Beatrice 
herself  as  the  impersonated  Revelation  and  learn  that 
Reason,  in  the  person  of  Virgil,  was  her  emissary, 
and  so  far  from  having  led  Dante  away  from  her 
had  been  the  means  of  bringing  him  back  to  her 
from  that  unfaithfulness  over  which  he  had  once 
attempted  to  throw  a  veil  of  allegory.  Our  problem 
is  to  find  further  light  on  the  last  step  in  this  pro- 
gression— I  mean  the  progression  from  Philosophy 
as  an  instrument,  through  Philosophy  as  a  consola- 
tion. Philosophy  as  an  enlargement  of  life  interests 
and  purposes,  and  Philosophy  as  a  screen,  back  to 
Philosophy  both  as  an  instrument  and  as  a  goal, 
though  not  the  supreme  and  ultimate  goal ;  and 
further  to  connect  this  same  progress  with  the  note- 
worthy fact  that  it  begins  by  receding  from  Beatrice 
and  ends  by  finding  her. 

136 


THE    "MONARCHIA"    &    THE    COMEDY 

To  help  us  in  this  task  we  note  (i)  that  Dante*s 
apparently  independent  reflections  had  brought  him 
to  convictions  which  constitute  an  intellectual  frame- 
work into  which  the  symbolism  of  his  final  synthesis 
fits  with  perfect  symmetry  (Monarchia)  ;  and  (2) 
that  this  final  movement  of  his  mind  was  accom- 
panied by  a  quickening  of  moral  perceptions  and 
deepening  of  his  spiritual  insight  which  have  lifted 
him  into  his  place  as  the  supreme  prophet-poet  of  all 
the  ages. 

"  The  Spirit  bloweth  where  it  listeth,**  and  in 
seeking  to  track  its  workings  we  may  often  mistake 
the  nature  of  the  fuel  that  chances  to  be  at  hand  for 
the  source  of  the  divine  and  consuming  flash  that 
enkindles  it.  But  we  can  only  work  within  the  limits 
of  our  own  powers,  and  we  must  often,  as  here,  be 
content  to  seek  in  outward  events  the  occasion  of 
that  which  must  ever  conceal  its  deeper  causes  from 
our  eyes. 

Once  again  it  is  in  the  events  of  1 308  to  1 3 1 3  that 
we  find  our  best  clue.  Henry  was  elected  Emperor 
in  1308,  he  was  crowned  at  Aix-la-Chapelle  in  the 
June  of  1309,  and  in  that  year  or  in  13 10  before  the 
autumn  we  may  suppose  the  Monarchia  to  have 
been  written.  In  the  autumn  of  1 3 10  Henry  crossed 
the  Alps  and  entered  Turin ;  in  the  January  of  1 3 1 1 
he  was  crowned  in  Milan;  and  in  that  same  year 
Dante  wrote  the  three  letters,  glowing  with  prophetic 
fervour  and  exaltation,  to  the  Princes  of  Italy,  to 
Henry  himself,  and  to  the  **  Florentines  within  " 
(as  opposed  to  the  Florentines  in  exile).   Then  the 

137 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

impossibilities  of  Henry*s  undertaking  relentlessly 
developed  themselves,  and  in  the  August  of  13 13 
he  died  near  Sienna,  a  saint  and  hero  who  had  only 
wrought  destruction  where  he  had  willed  salvation, 
baffled  by  a  world  he  loved  but  did  not  understand. 
Dante  had  felt  the  most  assured  confidence  in  the 
success  of  the  Emperor^s  expedition,  and  had  been 
unable  to  regard  the  resistance  of  Florence  as  any- 
thing but  an  act  of  blind  defiance  of  the  will  of  God 
and  the  authority  of  his  vicegerent  on  earth.  It  is 
one  of  our  most  precious  evidences  of  the  nobility 
of  his  character  that  in  the  moment  of  his  utmost 
confidence  in  immediate  and  conclusive  victory  his 
voice  was  raised  to  urge  his  fellow-exiles  not  to  re- 
turn as  conquerors  seeking  vengeance  and  making 
reprisals,  but  in  the  spirit  of  reconciled  brethren 
setting  behind  them  for  ever  the  weary  record  of 
sufferings  and  injustices.  When  Henry  was  en- 
camped before  the  walls  of  Florence,  Dante,  **  in 
reverence  for  his  native  land,"  refused  to  accompany 
him  in  the  triumphal  entry  to  which  he  looked 
forward.  But  in  actual  fact  neither  Henry's  nor 
Dante's  expectations  were  fulfilled.  Henry's  project 
had  from  the  first  been  impossible  of  execution,  for 
though  he  came  as  a  deliverer  and  pacifier  he  could 
have  no  executive  power  except  either  as  a  foreign 
conqueror  or  as  a  faction  leader.  Had  he  proved 
victorious  he  would  perhaps  have  failed  in  his  real 
purpose  even  more  disastrously  than  he  did  under 

Epist.  v:    69-93  [15-17].    Leonardo  Bruni:  Fita  di  Dante 
Alighieri. 

138 


THE    "MONARCHIa"    Sc    THE    COMEDY 

his  defeat.  His  army  had  to  withdraw  from  Florence, 
and  with  his  death  some  months  later  all  Dante's 
hopes  perished. 

Such  an  experience  may  shrivel  or  poison  a  man*s 
moral  nature,  or  it  may  throw  him  upon  the  deeper 
life  which  no  **  happenings  "  can  blight.  The 
Comedy  is  there  to  tell  us  how  Dante  faced  his 
altered  world.  In  such  a  crisis  there  is  no  proportion 
between  time  and  mental  or  spiritual  growth  and 
change.  Days  may  do  the  work  of  years.  Henry 
died  in  13 13,  and  it  is  impossible  to  put  the  con- 
ception and  initial  execution  of  the  Comedy,  as  an 
ordered  whole,  much  later  than  13 14.  What  has  the 
poet  of  the  Comedy  held  fast,  what  has  he  cast  away, 
and  what  has  h?  gained  ?  He  still  holds  fast  by  his 
lofty  conception  of  the  possibilities  of  this  earthly 
life  as  an  "  all-embracing  religious  order  **  ;  but  the 
glow  of  prophetic  rapture  and  the  anticipation  of  the 
immediate  redemption  of  human  society  have  passed 
away.  He  can  no  longer  cry  **  For  a  new  day  be- 
ginneth  to  glow,  showing  forth  the  dawn  which  is 
even  now  dissipating  the  darkness  of  our  long 
calamity  ;  and  already  the  breezes  of  the  east  begin 
to  blow,  the  lips  of  heaven  glow  red  and  confirm  the 
auspices  of  the  nations  with  a  caressing  calm."  No. 
The  vision  is  now  "  for  many  days  to  come.'*  The 
world  must  wait  in  patience  for  the  noble  "  hound  " 
of  Empire  who  is  to  **  harry  "  the  wolf  of  Greed 
**  through  every  city,"  and  who  at  last  "  will  hunt 
her  back  to  Hell."  Meanwhile  she,  with  the  other 
Convivh  IV.  iv  :   59-81  [6  /f.].     Epistoia  v  :   1-8  [i]. 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

beasts,  holds  the  mountain-side.  The  sunlit  height 
of  a  well-ordered  life  on  earth,  reflecting  the  happy- 
state  of  Eden,  cannot  as  yet  be  scaled,  and  he  who 
would  even  now  find  inward  peace  for  himself  and 
strive  to  "  remove  the  dwellers  in  this  life  from  the 
state  of  misery  and  bring  them  to  the  state  of  bliss  " 
must  not  look  for  the  triumphant  banner  of  a 
political  Messiah  to  lead  him.  "  Needs  must  he  take 
another  way,"  for  he  must  see  Hell  and  Purgatory 
and  Heaven,  and  must  recognize  what  he  himself 
has  been  and  what  he  was  called  to  be. 

Through  such  a  furnace  only  the  pure  ore  of 
truth  can  pass.  When  with  his  deepened  spiritual 
insight  and  his  quickened  moral  perceptions  Dante 
looked  back  upon  his  own  past  he  found  in  it  not 
only  much  to  deplore,  but  much  also  that  he  had 
himself  misread  but  could  now  read  aright.  Now 
that  speculations  on  divine  things  had  passed  from  a 
branch  of  philosophical  study  into  an  experience 
that  uplifted  the  soul  above  the  warfare  of  time  into 
the  peace  of  eternity  there  came  back,  as  from  the 
far-off  memory  of  a  childish  dream,  the  sense  of  one 
who  had  for  a  time  made  this  earth  bear  the  fruits 
of  Eden  for  him,  and  afterwards,  from  her  seat  in 
heaven,  had  drawn  his  pilgrim  soul  upward  into  a 
glory  that  the  illuminated  intelligence  could  catch 
for  a  moment  but  could  not  retain  in  the  memory 
or  bring  back  with  it  to  earth.  But  now  **  the  sweet- 
ness that  was  born  "  of  that  far-off  vision  once  again 
"dropped  within  his  heart,"  and  he  recognized  the 
beginning  in  the  end,  the  end  in  the  beginning. 

140 


THE    "MONARCHIA"    &    THE     COMEDY 

Beatrice  had  been,  and  was,  to  him  "  Revelation  **  in 
a  sense  even  deeper  than  that  in  which  Virgil  was 
"  Reason."  Why  did  he  only  know  it  now  ?  Why 
had  he  stubbornly  turned  away  from  the  thought  of 
her  ?  Only  because  the  **  false-seeming  pleasure  **  of 
unworthy  things  had  so  seduced  him  that  nothing 
short  of  a  veritable  journey  through  Hell  itself  could 
flash  upon  his  soul  the  conviction  of  the  true  worth 
of  that  which  he  had  chosen  and  of  that  which  he  had 
rejected.  The  vain  pretences  of  the  Convivio  were  a 
mockery.  Repudiation  and  evasion  are  not  repent- 
ance and  confession,  and  they  cannot  do  their  work. 
If  there  be  that  in  a  man*s  past  life  from  which  he 
would  fain  dissociate  himself  he  cannot  explain  it 
away.  He  must  purge  it  by  action  and  endurance 
that  outwork  and  only  so  outwash  its  stains.  As  long 
as  Dante  had  sought  in  his  studies  mainly  a  consola- 
tion for  Beatrice's  death,  or  had  found  in  them  escape 
into  opening  life  and  broadening  horizons,  and  yet 
more  when  he  had  flung  them  as  a  screen  between 
himself — or  the  world — and  a  past  that  grieved 
and  embarrassed  him,  so  long  could  he  in  one 
way  or  another  represent  Philosophy  as  having 
drawn  him  away  from  Beatrice.  But  when  he  under- 
stood that  through  his  studies  there  had  run  a  golden 
thread  linking  his  earliest  lessons  in  grammar  and 
logic  and  his  highest  eflx)rts  of  constructive  social 
and  political  idealism  with  his  deepest  assimilation 
of  the  thought  and  experience  of  saintly  theologians 

Paradiso  ixxiii :  58-63.  Vita  Nuova  ilii.    Purgatorio  xix  :  133- 
138.   Inferno  i,  ii. 

141 


THE     MINOR     WORKS 

and  mystics,  then  he  knew  how  far  from  this  noble 
path  that  by-way  stretched  on  which  he  had 
wandered  from  Beatrice ;  and  he  recognized  in 
Virgil,  the  personified  Reason,  the  emissary,  rather 
than  the  rival  of  Beatrice.  Philosophy  had  led  him 
back  to  her,  not  away  from  her,  and  she  herself  stood 
behind  the  flame  that  girt  the  Terrestrial  Paradise 
with  a  welcome  that  was  itself  the  bitterest  of  re- 
proaches ;  and  yet  a  reproach  that  opened  the  way 
through  repentance  to  salvation. 

Thus,  with  eyes  unsealed  Dante  saw  Hell,  with 
humbled  heart  he  climbed  the  Mount  of  Purgatory. 
Virgil  had  led  him  into  the  presence  of  Beatrice. 
His  eye  fell  before  her  and  his  heart  cried  in  anguish, 
**  That  is  what  I  love — and  this  is  what  I  am  1  ** 
And  then — the  draught  of  Lethe,  the  recovered 
Eden,  the  opened  heavens,  and  the  Beatific  Vision. 


142 


APPENDIX 


ON   THE   CHRONOLOGY   OF 
DANTE'S   WORKS 


<^'P'PE3^T>IX 

ON  THE  CHRONOLOGY  OF 
DANTE'S  WORKS 

It  would  be  foreign  to  my  purpose  to  enter  upon 
any  detailed  discussion  of  the  chronology  of  Dante's 
writings,  but  the  reader  may  reasonably  expect  a 
brief  statement  of  the  grounds  on  which  the  order 
of  composition  assumed  throughout  this  essay  has 
been  determined,  and  the  degree  to  which  the  re- 
construction it  attempts  is  dependent  upon  the 
chronological  scheme  adopted. 

As  to  the  FuaNuova  there  is  happily  no  need  of  dis- 
cussion. The  old  idea  that  it  was  not  completed  till  the 
year  1 300  rests  on  a  false  reading  {andava  for  i;^inxli: 
2  [i]),  and  it  is  now  generally  admitted  that  the  work 
must  have  been  finished  within  the  second  year  after 
Beatrice's  death,  that  is  to  say,  not  later  than  in  1292. 

The  Odes  were  composed  at  various  times.  Two 
of  them  seem  to  belong  to  the  cycle  of  the  Vita 
Nuova^  and  must  have  been  written  before  its  poems 
were  collected  and  enshrined  in  their  prose  frame- 
work. Two  others  contain  explicit  references  to  the 
poet's  exile  ;  one  of  them  {Amor^  dacchh  convien 
pur  cK  to  mi  dogIia\  lying  altogether  outside  the 
scheme  of  the  Cortvivio,  appears  to  be  the  latest  of  all. 
There  remain  eleven  Odes,  most  if  not  all  of  which 
we  may  suppose  to  belong  to  the  years  between 
1292  and  1302.  Some  scholars,  however,  would 
assign  one  or  two  of  these  also  to  a  later  date. 

The  First  Book  of  the  De  Vulgari  Eloquentia  con- 
tains references  to  contemporary  rulers  which  fix 

145  K 


APPENDIX 

the  date  of  1 304  for  its  composition  ;  and  there  is  no 
sufficient  reason  to  suppose,  as  some  have  done,  that 
any  considerable  interval  passed  between  the  writing 
of  the  First  Book  and  the  Second. 

The  Convivio  was  undertaken  when  Dante  had 
long  been  an  exile  (I.  iii  :  15-43  [3-5]>  iv  :  94- 
105  [13]).  An  allusion  in  the  Fourth  Book  (xxix  : 
16  sq,  [2])  fixes  1308,  with  high  probability,  as  the 
date  of  its  composition,  and  there  is  no  good  reason 
for  supposing  that  the  four  Books  were  written  in  any 
other  order  than  that  in  which  they  now  stand.  In 
particular  the  form  which  the  Fourth  Book  takes, 
breaking  away  as  it  does  from  the  general  scheme 
laid  down  in  the  Second  Book,  seems  to  indicate  that 
this  Fourth  Book  is  the  later  (Convivio  II.  i  :  119- 
126  [15]  ;  IV.  i :  89-92  [11]).  This  would  make 
the  Convivio  follow  the  De  Vulgari  Eloquentia, 

An  objection  may  be  based  on  a  passage  in  the 
Convivio  (I.  v  :  6 1  -69  [9  j^.])  in  which  Dante  speaks 
of  the  De  Vulgari  Eloquentia  as  a  work  which  he 
"  intends  to  write,*'  not  as  one  that  he  has  written. 
As  to  this  it  may  be  noted  that  as  both  the  treatises 
in  question  were  left  incomplete  by  their  author  he 
must  in  any  case  have  been  engaged  upon  one  of 
them  while  the  other  was  still  unfinished  and  might 
be  spoken  of  as  projected  rather  than  executed.  It 
may  be  freely  admitted  that  there  is  some  appearance 
of  violence  in  this  interpretation  of  the  words,  but 
the  positive  data  as  to  the  years  1304  for  the  one 
treatise  and  1 308  for  the  other  must  be  taken  to  out- 
weigh any  objection  on  that  score.  The  chronological 
relations  of  the  De  Vulgari  Eloquentia  and  the  Con- 

146 


CHRONOLOGY    OF    DANTE's    WORKS 

vivio  have,  however,  little  or  no  bearing  on  the 
mental  history  of  their  author. 

When  we  come  to  the  Monarchia  we  are  in  real 
difficulties.  Since  it  contains  no  reference  to  the 
author's  exile  it  used  to  be  supposed  by  some 
scholars  to  be  earlier  than  1302  and  to  follow  next 
after  the  Fita  Nuova  in  the  succession  of  Dante's 
principal  works.  But  it  is  so  obviously  maturer  than 
the  Convivio  that  it  cannot  be  supposed  to  precede 
it  in  time.  Others  have  placed  it  near  the  close  of 
Dante's  life,  for  it  offers  many  parallels  in  thought 
and  in  expression  to  the  Paradiso,  Indeed,  the  text, 
as  given  in  the  MSS.,  contains  a  direct  reference  to 
the  Paradiso  as  a  work  already  in  the  reader's  hands. 
In  the  passage  in  question  {Monarchia  I.  xii  :  39  sqq, 
[6])  we  read  **  Hec  libertas  [sc.  arbitrii]  sive  princi- 
pium  hoc  totius  libertatis  nostre,  est  maximum 
donum  humane  nature  a  deo  collatum  "  ;  and  the 
MSS.  add  **  sicut  in  paradiso  comedie  iam  dixi," 
which  must  be  understood  as  a  reference  to  Para- 
diso V  :  19-24.  But  the  strangeness  of  such  a  form 
of  reference  must  strike  any  reader  whom  long  study 
has  made  sensitive  to  Dante's  modes  of  expression. 
And  since  the  words  that  open  this  same  chapter  are 
**  Et  humanum  genus  potissime  liberum  optime  se 
habet.  Hoc  erit  manifestum  si  principium  pateat 
libertatis.  Propter  quod  sciendum  quod  principium 
primum  nostre  libertatis  est  libertas  arbitrii,"  it 
seemed  obvious  to  take  the  sicut  iam  dixi  as  a  reference 
back  to  this  passage,  and  to  regard  the  in  paradiso 
comedie  as  a  marginal  reference  (by  a  reader  who  had 
missed  the  point)  that  came  to  be  incorporated  in  the 

147 


APPENDIX 

text.  As  Dante  repeatedly  speaks  of  himself  in  the 
first  person  in  the  Monarchia  (cf.  I.  i  :  14  sg^,  [3 
s^q.]  ;  II.  i :  II  s^g,  [i]),  there  is  no  insurmountable 
difficulty  in  this  hypothesis,  and  it  has  been  adopted 
by  Witte  and  Moore.  Of  the  two  latest  editors, 
however,  Bertalot  accepts  and  Rostagno  rejects  the 
whole  of  the  passage  (cf,,  further,  nofe  i  on  next 
page).  For  myself  I  cannot  doubt  that  the  reference 
to  the  Paradiso  is  spurious.  Surely  it  is  inconceiv- 
able that  Dante,  after  speaking  of  the  Paradiso  as  he 
does  in  Canto  xxv  of  the  poem  itself,  and  in  his 
correspondence  with  Del  Virgilio,  could  have  written 
of  himself,  as  he  does  in  the  first  words  of  the 
Monarchia^  as  one  who  had  been  enriched  from  the 
open  fountains  of  wisdom  but  had  himself  made  no 
contribution  to  the  common  store.  Whereas  it  is 
conceivable  enough  that  when  the  Messianic  vision 
of  a  regenerated  Italy  broke  upon  him  with  Henry's 
election  he  might  regard  the  literary  and  academic 
activities  that  had  hitherto  so  largely  engrossed  his  en- 
ergies as  but  a  trivial  contribution  to  the  reorganiza- 
tion of  human  society  if  measured  against  the  debt  due 
from  the  heir  of  Justinian's  Law  and  VirgiFs  Gospel. 
Moreover,  the  great  Political  Letters,  which  quite 
certainly  date  from  the  first  years  of  Henry's  expedi- 
tion, 13 10  and  131 1,  and  the  Letter  to  the  Italian 
cardinals,  written  soon  after  Henry's  death  in  13 13, 
correspond  exactly  in  their  political,  ecclesiastical, 
and  philosophical  conceptions  (though  not  in  their 
tone)  with  the  Monarchia} 

^  The  solitary  exception  to  the  harmony  between  the  Letters  and 
the  Monarchia  is  found  in  the  fact  that  in  the  sixth  Epistle  (lines  53- 

148 


CHRONOLOGY    OF    DANTe's     WORKS 

On  the  balance  of  evidence,  then,  the  tradition 
that  connects  the  composition  of  the  Monarchia  with 
the  expedition  of  Henry  seems  to  be  justified,  but  in 
any  case  the  Letters  show  that  in  the  years  131 1- 
1 3 14  Dante  had  risen  above  the  cruder  system  of  the 
Convivio  and  had  definitely  reached  those  views 
which  find  their  complete  expression  in  the  Monar- 
chia (whenever  it  was  written)  and  underlie  the 
structure  of  the  Comedy  as  an  organic  whole.  This 
is  beyond  dispute,  and  happily  it  is  all  that  is  needed 
to  justify^  the  use  that  has  been  made  of  the  Monarchia 
in  my  attempted  reconstruction  of  the  movement  of 
Dante*s  mind  from  the  days  of  the  Vita  Nuova  to 
those  of  the  Comedy.^ 

55  [^])  ^^^  author  incidentally  adopts,  as  a  figure,  the  current  sym- 
bolism in  which  the  sun  and  moon  represent  respectively  the  Papacy 
and  the  Empire,  though  he  will  not  allow  it  as  the  basis  of  a  serious 
argument  in  the  Monarchia. 

^  Professor  Foligno,  in  the  volume  of  Commemorative  Essays 
issued  from  the  London  University  Press  in  1921,  pp.  143-156, 
argues,  with  abundant  references  to  recent  discussions,  for  a  date 
between  April  13 13  and  March  13 14,  chiefly  on  the  strength  of 
relations  which  certain  scholars  find  between  the  Monarchia  and  the 
papal  bull  Pastoralis  Cura,  together  with  a  Letter  subsequently 
issued  by  King  Robert  of  Sicily.  Professor  Foligno  accepts  the  sicut 
in  paradiso  passage  in  its  entirety,  but  regards  it  as  a  later 
addition  from  Dante's  own  hand.  *'  It  seems  scarcely  credible,"  he 
well  remarks, "  that  Dante  should  have  written  any  considerable  part 
of  the  treatise  and  far  less  initiated  such  a  work  after  Henry's  death  " 
(P*  ^53)*  ^y  o^"^  impression  is  strong  that  the  Monarchia  was 
written  before  the  Letters.  The  restraint  of  the  former  contrasted 
with  the  tone  of  exaltation  and  passion  of  the  latter  argues  that  the 
Treatise  was  written  in  the  hope  of  convincing,  before  the  crisis, 
when  men's  minds  were  expectant;  and  the  Letters  later  on,  when, 
at  the  crisis  itself,  men  were  swept  off  their  feet  by  hopes  and  fears. 

149 


APPENDIX 

And  now,  lastly,  as  to  the  Comedy  itself.  Almost 
the  only  certain  datum  we  have  is  derived  from 
Dante's  correspondence  with  Del  Virgilio.  From 
this  it  appears  that  in  the  year  13 19  the  Purgatorio 
was  already  completed  and  the  Paradiso  was  in  pro- 
gress. An  intimate  friend  like  Del  Virgilio  had  as 
yet  seen  little  or  nothing  of  it,  but  was  looking  for- 
ward to  its  appearance  with  eager  expectation. 

It  is  further  obvious  that  the  general  framework 
and  underlying  conceptions  of  the  Comedy  repre- 
sent a  later  stage  than  that  of  the  Convivio^  written 
about  1308,  just  before  Henry's  expedition.  And 
the  amazing  development  from  the  mentality  of  this 
work  revealed  in  the  Monarchia^  and  presupposed  in 
the  essential  conceptions  and  the  artistic  form  and 
scope  of  the  Comedy,  must  be  supposed  to  have 
taken  place  in  close  connection  with  Henry's  expedi- 
tion itself;  so  that  the  date  of  the  Comedy  as  a 
whole  would  be  subsequent  to  Henry's  death  in 
13 1 3.  In  full  accord  with  all  this  is  the  evidence  of 
a  passage  in  the  nineteenth  Canto  of  the  Inferno 
(lines  79—84),  in  which  reference  is  made,  under  the 
form  of  a  veiled  prophecy,  to  the  death  of  Clement  V, 
which  took  place  in  13 14. 

But  if  these  considerations  indicate  that  the 
Comedy,  as  an  organized  whole,  dates  from  the 
last  seven  years  of  Dante's  life  that  does  not  in  itself 
preclude  the  hypothesis  that  earlier  work  may  have 
been  incorporated  into  the  design.  The  great  passage 
in  the  sixth  Canto  of  the  Purgatorio  on  the  factions  of 
Italy  almost  forces  us  to  ask  whether  it  was  not 
written  while  Albert  was  still  on   the  throne,  or 

150 


CHRONOLOGY     OF    DANTE's    WORKS 

had  only  just  fallen  (May  1308).  And  the  close 
analogy  of  the  imagery  in  that  Canto  and  in  two 
passages  of  the  Convivio  (IV.  ix  :  100  sqq,  [10],  and 
xxvi :  43  sqq,  [6])  written  in  1308  has  suggested, 
in  spite  of  a  wide  divergence  of  tone,  a  coincident 
date.  I  have  sometimes  wondered  whether  the  great 
hymn  to  Francis  {Paradiso  xi),  with  or  without  its 
companion  in  Praise  of  Dominic,  was  originally  an 
independent  composition.  The  words  "la  cui  mirabil 
vita  meglio  in  gloria  del  ciel  si  canterebbe**  have 
puzzled  the  commentators,  for  the  encomium  is 
being  **  sung  in  heaven."  Has  it  been  transplanted 
there,  and  is  this  a  trace  of  the  soil  in  which  it  grew 
that  has  escaped  the  gardener's  notice  ?  Speculation 
is  rife  in  regard  to  the  actual  date  of  composition 
of  other  portions  of  the  Comedy  ;  and,  above  all, 
there  is  the  tradition,  already  referred  to  (p.  81), 
that  the  earlier  Cantos  of  the  Inferno  were  composed 
before  Dante*s  banishment.^  These  speculations, 
however,  should  be  kept  within  modest  limits  by 
the  cardinal  fact  that  in  1304,  or  later,  Dante  re- 
garded all  Italian  forms  of  verse  outside  the  Canzone^ 
the  Eallata^  and  the  Sonetto  as  "  irregular  and  ille- 
gitimate.** When  he  so  wrote  he  can  hardly  have 
had  in  his  mind  the  concept  of  a  great  synthetic 

^  In  an  article  on  the  ethical  system  of  the  Inferno  printed  in 
Modem  Language  Review,  vol.  xvi,No.  4,  October  1921, 1  have  tried 
to  show  how  my  (somewhat  hazardous)  suggestion  that  the  pre- 
exilian  draft  of  the  early  Gintos  of  the  Inferno  was  written  in  Latin 
would  fall  in  with  the  indirect  evidence  of  the  De  Vulgari  Eloquentia 
and  with  the  manifest  transformation  and  expansion  of  the  original 
plan  of  the  Inferno  which  may  be  detected  in  the  want  of  continuity 
and  symmetry  in  its  ethical  system. 


APPENDIX 

Italian  poem  on  the  scale  of  an  epic  and  aspiring 
to  the  position  of  a  classic.  So  it  would  seem  that 
whatever  instinctive  premonitions  may  have  shaped 
Dante's  earlier  experiments,  and  whatever  material 
he  may  have  found  ready  to  his  hand,  our  conclusion 
holds  that  the  Comedy,  as  we  know  it,  took  shape 
after  the  failure  of  Henry's  expedition  in  13 13. 
Its  whole  scheme,  as  foreshadowed  in  the  opening 
Cantos  of  the  Inferno^  cannot  have  been  firmly  laid 
down  and  held  at  any  earlier  period. 

The  outcome  of  our  examination  of  Dante's 
Minor  Works  is  the  conviction  that  whereas  there 
is  a  real  breach  in  some  respects  between  the  Vita 
Nuova  and  the  Convivioj  nevertheless,  in  the  purely 
mental  development  the  progress  is  steady  and  con- 
tinuous, in  a  uniform  direction,  from  the  Vita  Nuova^ 
through  the  Canzoni^  the  Convivio^  and  the  Monar- 
chia^  to  the  Comedy.  And  at  the  end  of  this  progress 
we  find  ourselves  brought  back  to  Beatrice,  from 
whom  at  first  it  seemed  to  be  leading  us  away. 

The  De  Vulgari  Eloquentta^  theEpisfo/^ythe  Eclog^^ 
and  the  De  Aqua  et  Terra  fall  easily  into  their  places 
in  the  scheme.  The  points  of  the  greatest  importance 
are  just  the  ones  most  securely  established  ;  and  it 
would  need  external  or  internal  evidence  of  a  very 
different  order  to  any  that  has  yet  been  urged  to 
shake  their  stability. 


Printed  in  England  at  the  Cloister  Press,  Heaton  Mersey,  near  Manchester 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SUPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


SSCN  BY 

pRESmy^oN 

SEI 


OATE.X^.r:.^ 


■    1 

'n